2003 infiniti g35

Foreword

Your INFINITI represents a new way of think-ing about vehicle design. It integrates ad-vanced engineering and superior craftsman-ship with a simple, refined aesthetic sensitivityassociated with traditional Japanese culture.

The result is a different notion of luxury andbeauty. The car itself is important, but so is thesense of harmony that the vehicle evokes inits driver, and the sense of satisfaction youfeel with the INFINITI — from the way it looksand drives to the high level of retailer service.

To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to thefullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’sManual immediately. It explains all of thefeatures, controls and performance character-istics of your INFINITI; it also provides impor-tant instructions and safety information.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletcan be found in your Owner’s literatureportfolio. Always carry it with you whenyou take your INFINITI to an authorizedretailer. The portfolio contents providecomplete information about all warrantiescovering this vehicle, the periodic mainte-nance required to keep the warranties ineffect as well as the INFINITI RoadsideAssistance program.

Additionally, a separate Customer Careand Lemon Law Information Booklet willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’slemon law.

INFINITI is dedicated to providing a satisfyingownership experience for as long as you ownyour car. Should you have any questionsregarding your INFINITI or your INFINITI re-tailer, please contact our Consumer Affairsdepartment at 1-800-662-6200. In Hawaii1-808-836-0888 (Oahu number). In Canada1-800-361-4792. Thank you.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVESAFELYBefore driving your vehicle please readyour Owner’s Manual carefully. This willensure familiarity with controls and main-tenance requirements, assisting you in thesafe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMA-TION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!

O Never drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

O Always observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast for condi-tions.

O Always use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Preteenchildren should be seated in the rearseat.

O Always provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety featuresto all occupants of the vehicle.

O Always review this Owner’s Manualfor important safety information.

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

MODIFICATION OF YOURVEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modi-fication could affect its performance,safety or durability, and may even violategovernmental regulations. In addition,damage or performance problems result-ing from modifications may not be coveredunder INFINITI warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUALThis manual includes information for alloptions available on this model. Therefore,you may find some information that doesnot apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrationsin this manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. INFINITI reserves the right to changespecifications or design at any time withoutnotice.

IMPORTANT INFORMATIONABOUT THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual.They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to yourvehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, theprocedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means Do not dothis or Do not let this happen .

SIC0697

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine Exhaust, some of its constitu-ents, and certain vehicle componentscontain or emit chemicals known to Stateof California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

© 2002 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.TOKYO, JAPAN

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual maybe reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or trans-mitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, me-chanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, withoutthe prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Table ofContents

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance

Technical and consumer information

Index

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

1 Seats, restraints and supplemental airbag systems

Seats ......................................................................... 1-2Front manual seat adjustment ............................. 1-2Front power seat adjustment (if so equipped) ..... 1-4Rear seat adjustment .......................................... 1-7Head restraint adjustment .................................... 1-9Active head restraint (front seats) ...................... 1-10

Supplemental restraint system................................ 1-11Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem ................................................................ 1-11Supplemental air bag warning labels ................. 1-23Supplemental air bag warning light.................... 1-23

Seat belts ................................................................ 1-25Precautions on seat belt usage ......................... 1-25Child safety......................................................... 1-27

Pregnant women ................................................ 1-29Injured persons................................................... 1-29Three-point type seat belt with retractor ............ 1-29Seat belt extenders ............................................ 1-32Seat belt maintenance ....................................... 1-32

Child restraints ........................................................ 1-33Precautions on child restraints ........................... 1-33Installation on rear seat outboard or centerpositions ............................................................. 1-35LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children)system ................................................................ 1-40Top tether strap child restraint ........................... 1-41Installation on front passenger seat ................... 1-43

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accidentyou could be thrown into it and re-ceive neck or other serious injuries.You could also slide under the lapbelt and receive serious internalinjuries.

O For most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seatshould be upright. Always sit wellback in the seat and adjust the seatbelt properly. See “Precautions onseat belt usage” later in this section.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT

WARNING

O Do not adjust the driver’s seat whiledriving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation. The seat maymove suddenly and could cause lossof control of the vehicle.

O After adjustment, gently rock in theseat to make sure it is securelylocked.SSS0133

SEATS

1-2 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up while you slide the seatforward or backward to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up andlean back. To bring the seatback forwardagain, pull the lever and move your bodyforward. The seatback will move forward.

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sseat)

Turn either dial to adjust the angle and heightof the seat cushion to the desired position.

SSS0169 SSS0168

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-3

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

FRONT POWER SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

WARNING

O Do not adjust the driver’s seat whiledriving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation.

O Do not leave children unattended in-side the vehicle. They could unknow-ingly activate switches or controls.Unattended children could becomeinvolved in serious accidents.

Operating tips

O The seat motor has an auto-reset overloadprotection circuit. If the motor stops duringoperation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivatethe switch.

O Do not operate the power seat for a longperiod of time when the engine is off. Thiswill discharge the battery.

See “Automatic seat positioner” in the “3.Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for auto-matic seat positioner operation.

Forward and backward (Sedan)

Moving the switch forward or backward willslide the seat forward or backward to thedesired position.

Reclining (Sedan)

Move the recline switch backward until thedesired angle is obtained. To bring the seat-back forward again, move the switch forwardand move your body forward. The seatbackwill move forward.

SSS0182


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Forward and backward (Coupe)

Moving the switch forward or backward willslide the seat forward or backward to thedesired position.

Reclining (Coupe)

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up andlean back. To bring the seatback forwardagain, pull the lever up and move your bodyforward. The seatback will move forward.

Seatback lever (Coupe, frontpassenger side)

The seatback lever can be used in the sameway as the reclining lever on the side of theseat from the driver’s seat.

Walk-in mechanism (Coupe)

O When the seatback lever or the reclininglever on the side of the seat is pulledupward, the seatback of the front passen-ger seat will tilt down moving the seatforward. This makes it easier to get in andout of the rear seat.

SSS0217 SSS0218


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

O To return the seat to its original position,raise the seatback and lock the seat. Theseat will return to its original position.

O The front passenger seat will stop at 7 in(175 mm) from its frontmost position toretain space for the rear passenger.

CAUTION

O When returning the seat to its originalposition, confirm the seat and seat-back are locked properly.

O Be careful not to pinch your hand orfoot or bump your head when operat-ing the walk-in seat. The seatback willfold down rapidly.

O Do not put any objects in front or rearof the seat. They may be pinched anddamaged.

The automatic forwarding and reversing willnot work or stop under the following condi-tions:

O When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7km/h).

O When the seat belt is fastened.

O When the selector lever is not in the P(Park) position (Automatic transmissionmodel’s driver’s seat) or the parking brakeis not applied (Manual transmission mod-el’s driver’s seat)

O When the door is closed.

O When the slide adjusting switch is oper-ated.

Seat lifter (Driver’s seat)

Pull the switch up or push it down to adjust theangle and height of the seat cushion.

SSS0183


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lowerback support to the driver. Move the lever upor down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

REAR SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Reclining (if so equipped)

Pull the reclining lever and position the seatback at the desired angle. Release the reclin-ing lever after positioning the seat at thedesired angle.

WARNING

O Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accidentyou could be thrown into it and re-ceive neck or other serious injuries.You could also slide under the lapbelt and receive serious internal inju-ries.

O For the most effective protectionwhen the vehicle is in motion, theseat should be upright. Always sitwell back in the seat and adjust theseat belt properly. See “Seat belts”later in this section for precautionson seat belt usage.

O After adjustment, check to be surethe seat is securely locked.

SSS0184 SSS0185


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Armrest (if so equipped)

Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

Interior trunk access

Sedan:

Pull the partition down to access the trunk fromthe rear seat.

The partition can be locked using the mas-ter key to prevent unauthorized access.

Remove the key while opening or closing thepartition. Otherwise, the partition may be dam-aged.

Coupe:

Pull the handle on the left side of the trunk andpush the seatback forward to access the trunkfrom the rear seat.

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo to help preventit from sliding or shifting. Do not placecargo higher than the seatbacks. In asudden stop or collision, unsecuredcargo could cause personal injury.

SSS0186

SSS0187 SSS0219


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

When raising the seatback, make sure to lockthe seatback. The pop up knob on the seat-back will latch in when the seatback is locked.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, just pull it up. Tolower, push the lock knob and push the headrestraint down.

SSS0220 SSS0236 SSS0125


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Adjust the head restraints so the center is levelwith the center of your ears.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjustedproperly as they may provide significantprotection against injury in an accident.Do not remove them. Check the adjust-ment after someone else uses the seat.

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (frontseats)

WARNING

O Always adjust the head restraintsproperly as specified in the previoussection. Failure to do so can reducethe effectiveness of the active headrestraint.

O Active head restraints are designedto supplement other safety systems.Always wear seat belts. No systemcan prevent all injuries in any acci-dent.

O Do not attach anything to the headrestraint stalks. Doing so could im-pair active head restraint function.

The head restraint moves forward utilizing theforce that the seatback receives from the oc-cupant in a rear-end collision. The movementof the head restraint helps support the occu-pant’s head by reducing its backward move-ment and helping absorb some of the forcesthat may lead to whiplash type injuries.

Active head restraints are effective for colli-sions at low to medium speeds in which it issaid that whiplash injury occurs most.

Active head restraints operate only in certainrear-end collisions. After the collision, the headrestraints return to their original positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraints asdescribed in the previous section.

SSS0178 SPA1025


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

PRECAUTIONS ONSUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)section contains important information con-cerning the driver and passenger front impactsupplemental air bags, front seat side-impactsupplemental air bags, curtain air bags andfront seat pre-tensioner seat belts.Supplemental front impact air bag system:This system can help cushion the impact forceto the face and chest of the driver and frontpassenger in certain frontal collisions.Supplemental side-impact air bag system:This system can help cushion the impact forceto the chest area of the driver and front pas-senger in certain side impact collisions. Thefront seat side-impact supplemental air bagsare designed to inflate on the side where thevehicle is impacted.Supplemental curtain side-impact air bagsystem: This system can help cushion theimpact force to the head of occupants in frontand rear outboard seating positions in certainside impact collisions. The curtain side-impactair bags are designed to inflate on the sidewhere the vehicle is impacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protection

provided by the driver and passenger seatbelts and are not a substitute for them. Seatbelts should always be correctly worn and theoccupant seated a suitable distance awayfrom the steering wheel, instrument panel anddoor finishers. (See “Seat belts” later in thissection for instructions and precautions onseat belt usage.)

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the systems are operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O The supplemental front air bags ordi-narily will not inflate in the event of aside impact, rear impact, roll over, orlower severity frontal collision. Al-ways wear your seat belts to helpreduce the risk or severity of injury invarious kinds of accidents.

O The seat belts and the supplementalfront air bags are most effective when

you are sitting well back and uprightin the seat. Front air bags inflate withgreat force. If you are unrestrained,leaning forward, sitting sideways orout of position in any way, you are atgreater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive seriousor fatal injuries from the supplemen-tal front air bag if you are up againstit when it inflates. Always sit backagainst the seatback and as far awayas practical from the steering

wheel or instrument panel. Alwaysuse the seat belts.

O The driver and front passenger seatbelt buckles are equipped with sen-sors that detect if the seat belts arefastened. The air bag system moni-tors the severity of a collision andthen inflates the air bags based onbelt usage. Failure to properly wearseat belts can increase the risk orseverity of injury in an accident.

O Keep hands on the outside of thesteering wheel. Placing them insidethe steering wheel rim could increasethe risk that they are injured when thesupplemental front air bag inflates.

SSS0131


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

SSS0132 SSS0006

SSS0007


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Never let children ride unrestrainedor extend their hands or face out ofthe window. Do not attempt to holdthem in your lap or arms. Some ex-amples of dangerous riding positionsare shown in the previous illustra-tions.

O Children may be severely injured orkilled when the supplemental front airbags, side air bags or curtain side-impact air bags inflate if they are notproperly restrained. Preteens andchildren should be properly re-strained in the rear seat if possible.

O Also never install a rear facing childrestraint in the front seat. An inflatingsupplemental front air bag could se-riously injure or kill your child. Foradditional information, see “Child re-straints” later in this section.

SSS0008

SSS0009

SSS0099

SSS0100


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag:

O The supplemental side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag ordinarilywill not inflate in the event of a frontalimpact, rear impact, rollover or lowerseverity side collision. Always wearyour seat belts to help reduce the riskor severity of injury in various kindsof accidents.

O The seat belts, the supplemental sideair bag and curtain side-impact airbag are most effective when you aresitting well back and upright in theseat. The side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag inflate with greatforce. Do not allow anyone to placetheir hand, leg or face near the sideair bag on the side of the seatback ofthe front seat or near the side roofrails. Do not allow anyone sitting inthe front seat or rear outboard seats

to extend their hand out of the win-dow or lean against the door. Someexamples of dangerous riding posi-tions are shown in the previous illus-trations.

O When sitting in the rear seat, do nothold onto the seatback of the frontseat. If the supplemental side air baginflates, you may be seriously in-jured. Be especially careful with chil-dren, who should always be properlyrestrained.

SSS0101 SSS0188 SSS0140


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere withsupplemental side air bag inflation.

SSS0159 SSS0162


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Supplemental air bag system

1. Crash zone sensor2. Supplemental front air bag modules3. Supplemental side air bag modules4. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bags

5. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bagmodules

6. Diagnosis sensor unit7. Seat belt pre-tensioner8. Satellite sensors

SSS0189A


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

The driver supplemental air bag is located inthe center of the steering wheel; the frontpassenger supplemental air bag is mounted inthe instrument panel above the glove box.These systems are designed to meet optionalcertification requirements under U.S. regula-

tions. They are also permitted in Canada. Theoptional certification allows front air bags to bedesigned to inflate somewhat less forcefullythan previously. However, all of the informa-tion, cautions and warnings in this manualstill apply and must be followed. The front

air bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although they mayinflate if the forces in another type of collisionare similar to those of a higher severity frontalimpact. They may not inflate in certain frontalcollisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is notalways an indication of proper supplementalair bag operation.

The supplemental air bag system has dualstage inflators for both the driver and passen-ger air bags. The system monitors informationfrom the crash zone sensor, the diagnosissensor unit and seat belt buckle sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened, inflatoroperation is based on the severity of a collisionand whether the seat belts are being used.Only one front air bag may inflate in a crash,depending on the crash severity and whetherthe front occupants are belted or unbelted.This does not indicate improper performanceof the system. If you have any questions aboutthe performance of your air bag system,please contact your INFINITI retailer.

When the supplemental front air bag inflates, afairly loud noise may be heard, followed byrelease of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire. Care should betaken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritationand choking. Those with a history of a breath-

SSS0221


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

ing condition should get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along with theuse of seat belts, helps to cushion the impactforce on the face and chest of the front occu-pants. They can help save lives and reduceserious injuries. However, an inflating front airbag may cause facial abrasions or other inju-ries. Front air bags do not provide restraint tothe lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn andthe driver and passenger seated upright as faras practical away from the steering wheel orinstrument panel. The supplemental front airbags inflates quickly in order to help protectthe front occupants. Because of this, the forceof the front air bag inflating can increase therisk of injury if the occupant is too close to, oris against, the air bag module during inflation.The air bag will deflate quickly after the colli-sion is over.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

O Do not place any objects on the steer-ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steer-ing wheel or instrument panel. Suchobjects may become dangerous pro-jectiles and cause injury if the supple-mental front air bag inflates.

O Right after inflation, several air bagsystem components will be hot. Donot touch them; you may severelyburn yourself.

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental front air bag sys-tem. This is to prevent accidentalinflation of the air bag or damage tothe air bag system.

O Do not make unauthorized changesto your vehicle’s electrical system,suspension system or front endstructure. This could affect proper

operation of the supplemental air bagsystem.

O Tampering with the supplementalfront air bag system may result inserious personal injury. Tamperingincludes changes to the steeringwheel and the instrument panel as-sembly by placing material over thesteering wheel pad, above the dash-board, or by installing additional trimmaterial around the air bag system.

O Work around and on the supplemen-tal front air bag system should bedone by an authorized INFINITI re-tailer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by an au-thorized INFINITI retailer. The yellowand orange Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) wiring and connectorsshould not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devicesshould not be used on the air bagsystem.


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

O A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshieldcould affect inflation of the supple-mental air bag system.

O The SRS wiring harness connectorsare yellow and orange for easy iden-tification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental frontair bag system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Supplemental side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag systems

The supplemental side air bags are located inthe outside of the seatback of the front seats.The supplemental curtain side-impact air bagsare located in the side roof rails. These sys-tems are designed to meet voluntary guide-lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occupants. However, all of theinformation, cautions and warnings in thismanual still apply and must be followed.The supplemental side air bags and curtainside-impact air bags are designed to inflate inhigher severity side collisions on the side of

the vehicle impacted, although they may in-flate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity side im-pact. They are designed to inflate on the sidewhere the vehicle is impacted. They may notinflate in certain side collisions. Vehicle dam-age (or lack of it) is not always an indication ofproper supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag operation.

When the supplemental side air bag and cur-tain side-impact air bag inflate, a fairly loudnoise may be heard, followed by release ofsmoke. This smoke is not harmful and doesnot indicate a fire. Care should be taken not toinhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking.Those with a history of a breathing conditionshould get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental side air bags, along with the useof seat belts, help to cushion the impact forceon the chest of the front occupants. Curtainside-impact air bags help to cushion the im-pact force to the head of occupants in the frontand rear outboard seating positions. They canhelp save lives and reduce serious injuries.However, an inflating side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag may cause abrasions orother injuries. Supplemental side air bags andcurtain side-impact air bags do not providerestraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and

SSS0190


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

the driver and passenger seated upright as faras practical away from the side air bag. Rearseat passengers should be seated as far awayas practical from the door finishers and sideroof rails. The side air bags and curtain side-impact air bag inflate quickly in order to helpprotect the front occupants. Because of this,the force of the side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag inflating can increase therisk of injury if the occupant is too close to, oris against, these air bag modules during infla-tion. The side air bag and curtain side-impactair bag will deflate quickly after the collision isover.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The air bag warning lightwill turn off after about 7 seconds if thesystems are operational.

WARNING

O Do not place any objects near theseatback of the front seats. Also, donot place any objects (an umbrella,bag, etc.) between the front door fin-isher and the front seat. Such objectsmay become dangerous projectiles

and cause injury if the side air baginflates.

O Right after inflation, several side airbag and curtain side-impact air bagsystem components will be hot. Donot touch them; you may severelyburn yourself.

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthis side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system. This is toprevent accidental inflation of theside air bag and curtain side-impactair bag or damage to the side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag sys-tem.

O Do not make unauthorized changesto your vehicle’s electrical system,suspension system or side panel.This could affect proper operation ofthe supplemental side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag system.

O Tampering with the supplementalsystem may result in serious per-

sonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seat by placing ma-terial near the seatback or by install-ing additional trim material, such asseat covers, around the side air bag.

O Work around and on the side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag sys-tem should be done by an authorizedINFINITI retailer. Installation of electri-cal equipment should also be doneby an authorized INFINITI retailer. TheSRS wiring harnesses* should not bemodified or disconnected. Unautho-rized electrical test equipment andprobing devices should not be usedon the side air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harnesses are cov-ered with yellow insulation either justbefore the harness connectors orover the complete harness for easyidentification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag system and guide


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

the buyer to the appropriate sections in thisOwner’s Manual.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (Forfront seats)

WARNING

O The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot bereused after activation. It must bereplaced together with the retractoras a unit.

O If the vehicle becomes involved in afrontal collision but the pre-tensioneris not activated, be sure to have thepre-tensioner system checked and, ifnecessary, replaced by your INFINITIretailer.

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt system.This is to prevent accidental activa-tion of the pre-tensioner seat belt ordamage to the pre-tensioner seat beltoperation. Tampering with the pre-tensioner seat belt system may re-

sult in serious personal injury.

O Work around and on the pre-tensioner system should be done byan authorized INFINITI retailer. Instal-lation of electrical equipment shouldalso be done by an authorizedINFINITI retailer. Unauthorized electri-cal test equipment and probing de-vices should not be used on the pre-tensioner seat belt system.

O If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or scrap the vehicle, con-tact an authorized INFINITI retailer.Correct pre-tensioner disposal proce-dures are set forth in the appropriateINFINITI Service Manual. Incorrectdisposal procedures could causepersonal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt systemactivates in conjunction with the supplementalfront air bag. Working with the seat belt retrac-tor, it helps tighten the seat belt the instant thevehicle becomes involved in certain types ofcollisions, thereby restraining seat occupants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat

belt’s retractor. These seat belts are used thesame as conventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,smoke is released and a loud noise may beheard. The smoke is not harmful, but careshould be taken not to inhale it as it may causeirritation and choking. Those with a history of abreathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensionerseat belt system, the supplemental air bagwarning light will not come on, will flashintermittently or will turn on for 7 seconds andremain on after the ignition key has beenturned to the ON or START position. In thiscase, the pre-tensioner seat belt may notfunction properly. They must be checked andrepaired. Take your vehicle to the nearestauthorized INFINITI retailer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seatbelt system and guide the buyer to the appro-priate sections in this Owner’s Manual.


Z 02.11.7/V35-D/V5.0 X

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental air bagsystem are placed in the vehicle as shown inthe illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, dis-playing in the instrument panel, monitorsthe circuits of the supplemental front air bag,supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag systems, and pre-tensionerseat belt. The circuits monitored by the air bagwarning light are the diagnosis sensor unit,satellite sensors, front air bag modules, sideair bag modules, curtain side-impact air bagmodules, pre-tensioner seatbelt and all relatedwiring.

After turning the ignition key to the ON posi-

SPA0945B SPA1097


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

tion, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates. The supplemental air bag warninglight will turn off after about 7 seconds if thesystem is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental front air bag, supplemental sideair bag and curtain side-impact air bag sys-tems, and pre-tensioner seat belt need servic-ing:

O The supplemental air bag warning lightremains on after approximately 7 seconds.

O The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

O The supplemental air bag warning lightdoes not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplemental frontair bags, supplemental side air bags, curtainside-impact air bags and/or pre-tensioner seatbelt may not operate properly. They must bechecked and repaired. Take your vehicle to thenearest authorized INFINITI retailer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the supplemen-

tal front air bag, supplemental side airbag, curtain side-impact air bag sys-tems and/or pretensioner seat beltwill not operate in an accident.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supplementalside air bags, curtain side-impact air bags andpre-tensioner seat belts are designed to acti-vate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bagwarning light will remain illuminated after infla-tion has occurred. Repair and replacement ofthese systems should be done only by anauthorized INFINITI retailer.

When maintenance work is required on thevehicle, the supplemental front air bags, sideair bags, curtain side-impact air bags, relatedparts and pre-tensioner seat belt should bepointed out to the person conducting the main-tenance. The ignition key should always be inthe LOCK position when working under thehood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

O Once the supplemental front air bag,side air bag or curtain side-impact airbag has inflated, the air bag modulewill not function again and must bereplaced. Additionally, if any of thesupplemental front air bags inflate,the activated pre-tensioner seat beltmust also be replaced. The air bagmodule and pre-tensioner seat beltsystem should be replaced by an au-thorized INFINITI retailer. The air bagmodules and pre-tensioner seat beltsystem cannot be repaired.

O The supplemental front air bag andside air bag, curtain side-impact airbag systems and pre-tensioner seatbelt system should be inspected byan authorized INFINITI retailer if thereis any damage to the front end or sideportion of the vehicle.

O If you need to dispose of thesesupplemental systems or scrap thevehicle, contact an authorizedINFINITI retailer.


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Correct disposal procedures are setforth in the appropriate INFINITI Ser-vice Manual. Incorrect disposal pro-cedures could cause personal injury.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGE

Your chances of being injured or killed in anaccident and/or the severity of injury may begreatly reduced if you are wearing your seatbelt and it is properly adjusted. INFINITIstrongly encourages you and all of your pas-sengers to buckle up every time you drive,even if your seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most states, provinces or territories requirethat seat belts be worn at all times when avehicle is being driven.

SEAT BELTS


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Every person who drives or rides inthis vehicle should use a seat belt atall times. Children should be properlyrestrained and, if appropriate, in achild restraint.

O The belt should be properly adjustedto a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in anaccident. Serious injury or death canoccur if the seat belt is not wornproperly.

O Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never run the belt behind your backunder your arm or across your neck.The belt should be away from yourface and neck, but not falling off yourshoulder.

O Position the lap belt as low and snugas possible around the hips, not thewaist. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

O Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-curely fastened to the proper buckle.

O Do not wear the belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce its ef-fectiveness.

O Do not allow more than one person touse the same belt.

O Never carry more people in the ve-hicle than there are seat belts.

O If the seat belt warning light glowscontinuously while the ignition isturned ON with all doors closed andall seat belts fastened, it may indicatea malfunction in the system. Have thesystem checked by an authorizedINFINITI retailer.

O Once the pre-tensioner seat belt hasactivated, it cannot be reused andmust be replaced together with the

SSS0136


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

retractor. See your INFINITI retailer.

O Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner seat belt system compo-nents should be done by an autho-rized INFINITI retailer.

O All seat belt assemblies including re-tractors and attaching hardwareshould be inspected after any colli-sion by your INFINITI retailer. INFINITIrecommends that all seat belt assem-blies in use during a collision bereplaced unless the collision was mi-nor and the belts show no damage

and continue to operate properly.Seat belt assemblies not in use dur-ing a collision should also be in-spected and replaced if either dam-age or improper operation is noted.

O All child restraints and attachinghardware should be inspected afterany collision. Always follow the re-straint manufacturer’s inspection in-structions and replacement recom-mendations. The child restraintsshould be replaced if they are dam-aged.

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

The proper restraint depends on the child’ssize. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year andless than 20 lb (9 kg) should be placed in rearfacing child restraints. Front facing child re-straints are available for children who outgrowrear facing child restraints.

SSS0134 SSS0016


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro-tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may notfit them properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. Thelap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperlyfitting seat belt could cause serious orfatal injury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All US states and provinces of Canada requirethe use of approved child restraints for infantsand small children. (See “Child restraints” laterin this section.)

In addition, there are many types of childrestraints available for larger children whichshould be used for maximum protection.

INFINITI recommends that all preteens andchildren be restrained in the rear seat ifpossible. According to accident statistics,children are safer when properly restrainedin the rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-tem (air bag system) for the front passen-ger. See “Supplemental Restraint System”earlier in this section for precautions.

Infants and small children

INFINITI recommends that infants and smallchildren be placed in child restraints that com-ply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards. You should choose a child restraint thatfits your vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraintsystems should be seated and restrained bythe seat belts which are provided.

If the child’s seating position has a shoulderbelt that fits close to the face or neck, the useof a booster seat (commercially available) mayhelp overcome this. The booster seat shouldraise the child so that the shoulder belt isproperly positioned across the top, middleportion of the shoulder and the lap belt is lowon the hips. The booster seat should fit thevehicle seat and have a label certifying that itcomplies with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. Once the child has grown so theshoulder belt is no longer on or near the faceand neck, use the shoulder belt without thebooster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoareas while the vehicle is moving. Thechild could be seriously injured or killedin an accident or a sudden stop.

SSS0014


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

PREGNANT WOMEN

INFINITI recommends that pregnant womenuse seat belts. The seat belt should be wornsnug, and always position the lap belt as lowas possible around the hips, not the waist.Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder andacross your chest. Never run the lap/shoulderbelt over your abdominal area. Contact yourdoctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

INFINITI recommends that injured personsuse seat belts, depending on the injury. Checkwith your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

O Every person who drives or rides inthis vehicle should use a seat belt atall times.

O Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident

you could be thrown into it and re-ceive neck or other serious injuries.You could also slide under the lapbelt and receive serious internal inju-ries.

O For the most effective protectionwhen the vehicle is in motion, theseat should be upright. Always sitwell back in the seat and adjust theseat belt properly.

SSS0018 SSS0020


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Fastening the seat belts1. Adjust the seat.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle until itclicks.

The retractor is designed to lock during asudden stop or on impact. A slow pullingmotion will permit the belt to move, andallow you some freedom of movement inthe seat.If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fullyretracted position, firmly pull the belt and re-lease it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of theretractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack.

The front passenger and rear seat belts have acinching mechanism for child restraint installa-tion. It is referred to as the automatic lockingmode.

When the cinching mechanism is activated theseat belt cannot be withdrawn again until theseat belt tongue is detached from the buckleand fully retracted. For additional information,see “Child restraints” later in this section.

The automatic locking mode should beused only for child restraint installation.During normal seat belt use by a passen-ger, the locking mode should not be acti-vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom-fortable seat belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat seatbacks are completely securedin the latched position. If they are notcompletely secured, passengers may beinjured in an accident or sudden stop.SSS0102 SSS0061


Z 02.11.1/V35-D/V5.0 X

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, press the button on thebuckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.

Checking seat belt operation

Your seat belt retractors are designed to lockbelt movement using two separate methods:

O when the belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

O when the vehicle slows down rapidly.

You can check their operation as follows:

O grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly

forward. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this checkor if you have any questions about belt opera-tion, see your INFINITI retailer.

Shoulder belt height adjustment(For Sedan front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should beadjusted to the position best suited for you.(See “Precautions on seat belt usage” earlierin this section.) To lower, pull the releasebutton, and then move the shoulder belt an-chor to the desired position, so that the beltpasses over the shoulder. Release the adjust-ment button to lock the shoulder belt anchorinto position.

To raise, move the adjuster up to the desiredposition while pulling the button.

SSS0021 SPA0739


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move theshoulder belt down to make sure it issecurely fixed in position.

O The shoulder belt anchor heightshould be adjusted to the positionbest for you. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in anaccident.

Shoulder belt guide (Coupe)

The shoulder arm can be adjusted to alloweasier access to the shoulder belt. The armcan also be folded down to allow rear seatpassengers easier access.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender is available which iscompatible with the installed seat belts. Theextender adds approximately 8 inches (200mm) of length and may be used for either thedriver or front passenger seating position. See

your INFINITI retailer for assistance if theextender is required.

WARNING

O Only INFINITI belt extenders, made bythe same company which made theoriginal equipment belts, should beused with INFINITI belts.

O Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary usecould result in serious personal in-jury in the event of an accident.

O Never use seat belt extenders to in-stall child restraints. If the child re-straint is not secured properly, thechild could be seriously injured in acollision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

O To clean the seat belt webbings, apply amild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.Then brush the webbing, wipe it with a clothand allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow

SSS0222


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

the seat belts to retract until they are com-pletely dry.

O If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide ofthe seat belt anchors, the seat belts mayretract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guidewith a clean, dry cloth.

O Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire belt assemblyshould be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

O Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriatechild restraint while riding in the ve-hicle. Failure to use a child restraintcan result in serious injury or death.

O Infants and small children shouldnever be carried on your lap. It is notpossible for even the strongest adultto resist the forces of a severe acci-dent. The child could be crushed be-tween the adult and parts of the ve-hicle. Also, do not put the same seatbelt around both your child and your-self.

O Never install a rear facing child re-straint in the front seat. An inflatingsupplemental air bag could seriouslyinjure or kill your child. A rear facingchild restraint must only be used inthe rear seat.

O INFINITI recommends that the childrestraint be installed in the rear seat.According to accident statistics, chil-dren are safer when properly re-strained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.

O An improperly installed child re-straint could lead to serious injury ordeath in an accident.

In general, child restraints are designed to beinstalled with the lap portion of a three-pointtype seat belt. In addition, this vehicle isequipped with a universal child restraint loweranchor system, referred to as the LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) sys-tem. Some child restraints include two rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can beconnected to these lower anchors. For details,see “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether forChildren) SYSTEM” later in this section.Child restraints for infants and children ofvarious sizes are offered by several manufac-turers. When selecting any child restraint,keep the following points in mind:

O Choose only a restraint with a label certify-ing that it complies with Federal Motor

CHILD RESTRAINTS


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

O Check the child restraint in your vehicle tobe sure it is compatible with the vehicle’sseat and seat belt system.

O If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child re-straint and check the various adjustmentsto be sure the child restraint is compatiblewith your child. Always follow all recom-mended procedures.

All US states and Canadian provinces re-quire that infants and small children berestrained in approved child restraints atall times while the vehicle is being oper-ated.

WARNING

O Improper use of a child restraint canresult in increased injuries for boththe infant or child and other occu-pants in the vehicle.

O Follow all of the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for installationand use. When purchasing a child

restraint, be sure to select one whichwill fit your child and vehicle. It maynot be possible to properly installsome types of child restraints in yourvehicle.

O If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child beinginjured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

O Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the child restraint, but asupright as possible.

O After attaching the child restraint,test it before you place the child in it.Tilt it from side to side. Try to tug itforward and check to see if the beltholds the restraint in place. The childrestraint should not move more than1 inch. If the restraint is not secure,tighten the belt as necessary, or putthe restraint in another seat and testit again.

O For a front facing child restraint,check to make sure the shoulder beltdoes not go in front of the child’s face

or neck. If it does, put the shoulderbelt behind the child restraint. If you-must install a front facing child re-straint in the front seat, see instruc-tions later in this section.

O When your child restraint is not inuse, store it in the trunk or keep itsecured with a seat belt to prevent itfrom being thrown around in case ofa sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the childrestraint.


Z 02.11.1/V35-D/V5.0 X

INSTALLATION ON REAR SEATOUTBOARD OR CENTERPOSITIONS

WARNING

O The three-point belt on your vehicle isequipped with a locking mode retrac-tor which must be used when install-ing a child restraint.

O Failure to do so will result in the childrestraint not being properly secured.It could tip over or otherwise be un-secured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision. Front facing

When you install a child restraint in a rearoutboard or center seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Itcan be placed in a front facing direction,depending on the size of the child. Alwaysfollow the restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

SSS0153 SSS0154


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the beltis fully extended. At this time, the beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts back toemergency locking mode when the belt isfully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the beltto remove any slack in the belt.

SSS0043 SSS0107 SSS0062


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

5. Before placing the child in the child re-straint, use force to tilt the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward to makesure that it is securely held in place. Itshould not move more than 1 inch.

6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more belt outof the retractor. If you cannot pull any morebelt webbing out of the retractor, the belt isin the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use. If thebelt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is allowed to wind back into theretractor, the automatic locking mode (childrestraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt onlylocks during a sudden stop or impact.

Rear facing

When you install a child restraint in a rearoutboard or center seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Thedirection of the child restraint depends onthe type of the child restraint and the size ofthe child. Always follow the restraint manu-facturer’s instructions.

SSS0108 SSS0155


Z 02.11.1/V35-D/V5.0 X

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for belt routing.


SSS0156 SSS0046 SSS0045A


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X




7. Check to make sure that the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use. If thebelt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.


SSS0109 SSS0110


Z 02.11.1/V35-D/V5.0 X

LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS ANDTETHER FOR CHILDREN)SYSTEM

WARNING

O Attach LATCH system compatiblechild restraints only at the locationsshown. If a child restraint is not se-cured properly, your child could beseriously injured or killed in anaccident.

O Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position using thechild restraint lower anchors. Thechild restraint will not be securedproperly.

O The LATCH system anchors are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstance arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

Some child restraints include two rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can be

connected to two anchors located at certainseating positions in your vehicle. This systemis known as the LATCH (Lower Anchors andTether for Children) system. This system mayalso be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIXcompatible system. With this system, you donot have to use a vehicle seat belt to securethe child restraint. Your vehicle is equippedwith special anchor points that are used withLATCH system compatible child restraints.Check your child restraint for a label statingthat it is compatible with the LATCH system.This information may also be in the childrestraint owner’s manual. If you have such achild restraint, refer to the illustration for therear seating positions equipped with LATCHsystem anchors which can be used to securethe child restraint.

The LATCH system anchors are located at therear of the seat cushion near the seatback. Alabel is attached to the seatback to help youlocate the LATCH system anchors.

Some child restraints may also require the useof a top tether strap. See “Top tether strapchild restraint” later in this section for installa-tion instructions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint.

SSS0191A SSS0223


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

When you install a LATCH system compatiblechild restraint to the lower anchor attachmentsin the rear seat, follow these steps.

WARNING

Inspect the lower anchors by insertingyour fingers into the lower anchor areaand feeling to make sure there are noobstructions over the LATCH systemanchors, such as seat belt webbing orseat cushion material. The child re-straint will not be secured properly if theLATCH system anchors are obstructed.

1. To install the LATCH system compatiblechild restraint, adjust the height of the childrestraint LATCH system anchor attach-ments to the anchor points on the rear seat.

2. Insert the anchor attachments into the an-chor points. If the child restraint is equippedwith a top tether, see “Top tether strap childrestraint” later in this section for installationinstructions.

3. After attaching the child restraint and beforeplacing the child in it, use force to tilt thechild restraint from side to side and tug itforward to make sure that the child restraint

is securely held in place. It should not movemore than 1 inch.

4. Check to make sure that the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILDRESTRAINT

WARNING

O The child restraint anchor point isdesigned to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fittedchild restraints. Under no circum-stance is it to be used for adult seatbelts or harnesses.

SSS0192A


Z 02.11.6/V35-D/V5.0 X

O After removing a rear seat head re-straint for top tether installation,store it securely to prevent it fromcausing injury to passengers or dam-age to the vehicle in case of suddenbraking or an accident. Always re-place it and adjust properly when toptether is no longer in use.

If your child restraint has a top tether strap, itmust be secured to the anchor point providedbehind its position.

First, adjust the seat back so that it is upright.Remove the anchor cover from the anchorpoint as illustrated. Keep the removed cover ina secure place to prevent loss or damage.Then secure the child restraint with the topseat belt or the LATCH system (outboardposition) as applicable.

Remove the head restraint from the seat backif equipped with an adjustable rear head re-straint. Store it in a secure place. Position thetop tether strap over the top of the seat backand secure it to the tether anchor bracket thatprovides the straightest installation. Tightenthe tether strap according to the manufactur-er’s instruction to remove any slack.

For best child restraint fit, see the child re-straint installation instructions in this sectionand the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

Anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the rear parcelshelf finisher.

If you have any questions when installing atop strap child restraint on the rear seat,consult your INFINITI retailer for details.

SSS0224


Z 02.11.6/V35-D/V5.0 X

INSTALLATION ON FRONTPASSENGER SEAT

WARNING

O Never install a rear facing child re-straint in the front passenger seat.Supplemental air bags inflate withgreat force. A rear facing child re-straint could be struck by the supple-mental air bag in a crash and couldseriously injure or kill your child.

O INFINITI recommends that child re-straints be installed in the rear seat.However, if you must install a frontfacing child restraint in the front pas-senger seat, move the passengerseat to the rearmost position.

O A child restraint with a top tetherstrap should not be used in the frontpassenger seat.

O The three-point belt in your vehicle isequipped with a locking mode retrac-tor which must be used when install-

ing a child restraint.

O Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The childrestraint could tip over or otherwisebe unsecured and cause injury to thechild in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0129


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Front facing

If you must install a child restraint in the frontseat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the frontpassenger seat. It should be placed in afront facing direction only. Move the seatto the rearmost position. Always follow thechild restraint manufacturer’s instructions.Child restraints for infants must be usedin the rear facing direction and thereforemust not be used in the front seat.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage. Be sureto follow the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions for belt routing.


SSS0135 SSS0055 SSS0113


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X




7. Check to make sure that the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use. If thelap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 6.


SSS0056 SSS0114


Z 02.11.1/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel ....................................................... 2-2Meters and gauges ................................................... 2-3

Speedometer and odometer ................................ 2-4Tachometer .......................................................... 2-4Engine coolant temperature gauge...................... 2-5Fuel gauge ........................................................... 2-5

Compass display ...................................................... 2-6Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders........ 2-9

Checking bulbs..................................................... 2-9Warning lights....................................................... 2-9Indicator lights .................................................... 2-11Audible reminders .............................................. 2-13

Security systems ..................................................... 2-13Vehicle security system...................................... 2-13Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System ................... 2-14

Windshield wiper and washer switch ...................... 2-16Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch ....................................................... 2-16Headlight and turn signal switch ............................. 2-17

Xenon headlights (if so equipped) ..................... 2-17Headlight switch ................................................. 2-17Turn signal switch .............................................. 2-19

Fog light switch ....................................................... 2-20Hazard warning flasher switch................................ 2-20

Horn......................................................................... 2-21Heated seats (if so equipped)................................. 2-21Vehicle dynamics control (VDC) off switch ............ 2-22Clock ....................................................................... 2-23

Adjusting the time............................................... 2-23Power outlet ............................................................ 2-23Cigarette lighter and ashtray (accessory) ............... 2-24Storage.................................................................... 2-25

Instrument pocket (Except for Navigation systemequipped models) ............................................... 2-25Pocket (Manual transmission model) ................. 2-25Glasses case...................................................... 2-26Cup holder.......................................................... 2-26Glove box ........................................................... 2-27Upper glove box (Except for Navigation systemequipped models) ............................................... 2-28Console box ....................................................... 2-28Rear armrest pocket........................................... 2-29Cargo net............................................................ 2-29Coat hook (Coupe)............................................. 2-30Stowing golf bags............................................... 2-30

Windows.................................................................. 2-31Power windows .................................................. 2-31Automatic adjusting function (Coupe) ................ 2-33

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Sunroof (if so equipped) ......................................... 2-33Automatic sunroof .............................................. 2-33

Interior light ............................................................. 2-35Interior light......................................................... 2-35Map light ............................................................. 2-35Rear personal light ............................................. 2-36

Vanity mirror light (if so equipped).......................... 2-36Trunk light ............................................................... 2-37HomeLink Universal Transceiver(if so equipped) ....................................................... 2-37

Programming HomeLink ................................... 2-38Programming HomeLink for Canadiancustomers ........................................................... 2-39Operating the HomeLink UniversalTransceiver......................................................... 2-39Programming trouble diagnosis.......................... 2-39Clearing the programmed information................ 2-40Reprogramming a single HomeLink button...... 2-40If your vehicle is stolen ...................................... 2-40

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch(P.2-17)

2. Steering switch for audio control (P.4-16)3. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-8)/Horn

(P.2-21)4. Meters/gauges (P.2-3)

5. Cruise control main/set switch (P.5-11)6. Windshield wiper/washer switch (P.2-16)7. Center ventilator (P.4-2)8. Center display - Compass (P.2-6), Air con-

ditioner (P.2-6), Ambient temperature(P.2-6)

9. Rear window and outside mirror (if soequipped) defogger switch (P.2-16)

10. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-3)11. Clock (P.2-23)12. Navigation system* (if so equipped)13. Security indicator light (P.2-14)14. Passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-8)15. Upper glove box (Except for Navigation

system equipped models) (P.2-26)16. Side window defroster17. Side ventilator (P.4-2)18. Hood lock release handle (P.3-9)19. Instrument brightness control switch

(P.2-19)20. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-11)21. VDC (Vehicle Dynamics Control) OFF

switch (P.2-22)22. Outside mirror remote control (P.3-15)23. Fuse box (P.8-20)24. Tilting steering wheel lock lever (P.3-14)25. Ignition switch/steering lock (P.5-4)26. Cigarette lighter (P.2-24)27. Ashtray (P.2-24)/Pocket28. Radio/cassette player (P.4-8)/CD player

(P.4-8)29. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-20)30. Heated seat switch (P.2-21)31. Power outlet32. Glove box (P.2-26)

SIC2023

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

See the page indicated in parentheses foroperating details.*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

1. Warning/Indicator lights

2. Speedometer

3. Tachometer

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge

5. Automatic transmission position indicator

6. Odometer (Total/Twin trip)

7. Reset knob for trip odometer

8. Fuel gauge

SIC1828

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer are displayedwhen the ignition key is in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance thevehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance ofindividual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the reset knob changes the display asfollows:

TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the reset knob for more than 1 secondresets the trip odometer to zero.

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute (r/min).

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear. Operatingthe engine in the red zone may causeserious engine damage.

SIC1826 SIC1827


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

ENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem-perature.

The engine coolant temperature will vary withthe outside air temperature and driving condi-tions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolanttemperature over the normal range, stopthe vehicle as soon as safely possible. Ifthe engine is overheated, continued op-eration of the vehicle may seriouslydamage the engine. See “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “6. In case of emer-gency” section for immediate action re-quired.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or down hill.

The gauge needle is designed to move to theE (Empty) position when the ignition key isturned to the OFF position.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters Empty.

SIC1829 SIC1830


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

The low fuel warning light comes on whenthe fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soonas it is convenient, preferably before thegauge reaches E. There will be a smallreserve of fuel in the tank when the fuelgauge needle reaches E.

The indicates that the fuel filler lid islocated on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

O If the vehicle runs out of fuel, themalfunction indicator lamp

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon aspossible. After a few driving trips, the

lamp should turn off. If the lampremains on after a few driving trips,have the vehicle inspected by an au-thorized INFINITI retailer.

O For additional information, see the“Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)”later in this section.

Push COMP switch to turn the display on or offwhen the ignition key is in the ON position. Theheading direction will be displayed.

N: north

E: east

S: south

W: west

m: vehicle direction

The above example shows the displaychanges from “East” to “East-southeast”.

If the compass unit does not receive anycorrect signal for 10 minutes, the compass willdisplay the bar “-- -- --”. Have the vehicleinspected by an authorized INFINITI retailer.

SIC1842B

COMPASS DISPLAY


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north andgeographical north is known as variance. Insome areas, this difference can sometimes begreat enough to cause false compass read-ings. Follow these instructions to set the vari-ance for your particular location if this hap-pens:

1. Establish your location on the zone map.Record your zone number.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON positionwhile pressing the COMP switch.

3. Continue to press the COMP switch formore than 5 seconds until the current zoneentry number is displayed on the compass.

If any operations are not carried out for morethan 5 seconds, the display shows direction asnormal.

4. Press COMP switch repeatedly until thenew zone entry number is displayed.

Once the desired zone number is displayed,stop pressing the COMP switch and the dis-play will show compass direction within a fewseconds.

SIC0611


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

If a magnet is located near the driver sideinstrument panel (the sensor is locatedinside) or the vehicle is driven where theterrestrial magnetism is disturbed, thecompass display may not indicate the cor-rect direction.

O The compass may not display correctly atthe following places:• under a bridge• among buildings• on an iron bridge• inside a tunnel• above a subway• on a railway crossing• in an underground parking lot• near a huge vehicle• near a transformer substationIf you carry out correction procedure at oneof the above places, the procedure may notbe completed correctly.

O If air conditioner fan speed is maximum, thecompass display may shake. This is nor-mal. Reduce the fan speed to avoid shakingthe display.

Correction functions of the compassdisplay

If the direction is not shown correctly, carry outcorrection procedure set out below.

Correction procedure

1. Push COMP switch for about 10 seconds.The direction bar starts blinking.

2. Turn off electrical equipment such as lights,hazard indicator, air conditioner, etc. Thendrive the vehicle slowly (less than 3 MPH (5km/h)) and turn the vehicle one or moretimes in an open and safe area. When thecompass displays the direction, the proce-dure is completed.


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

or Anti-lock brake warning light Low washer fluid warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)

Automatic transmission check warninglight

Seat belt warning light Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Slip indicator light

Charge warning light or Automatic transmission posi-tion indicator light

Vehicle dynamics control off indicatorlight

Door open warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise set switch indicator light

CHECKING BULBSApply the parking brake and turn the ignitionkey to ON without starting the engine. Thefollowing lights will come on:

, or , ,

The following lights come on briefly and thengo off:

, or , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate aburned-out bulb or an open circuit in the elec-trical system. Have the system repairedpromptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock brakewarning light

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate the anti-lock brakesystem is not functioning properly. Have thesystem checked by your INFINITI retailer.

If an abnormality occurs in the system, theanti-lock function will cease but the ordinarybrakes will continue to operate normally.

If the light comes on while you are driving,contact your INFINITI retailer for repair.

Automatic transmission checkwarning light

When the ignition switch is turned ON, the lightcomes on for 2 seconds. If the light blinks forapproximately 8 seconds, it may indicate theautomatic transmission system is not function-ing properly. Have your INFINITI retailer checkand repair the transmission.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brakeand the foot brake systems.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTSAND AUDIBLE REMINDERS


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Parking brake indicator:

When the ignition key is in the ON position, thelight comes on when the parking brake isapplied.

Low brake fluid warning light:

The light warns of a low brake fluid level. If thelight comes on while the engine is running withthe parking brake not applied, stop the vehicleand perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “8.Do-it-yourself” section.

WARNING

O Your brake system may not be work-ing properly if the warning light is on.Driving could be dangerous. If youjudge it to be safe, drive carefully tothe nearest service station for re-pairs. Otherwise, have your vehicletowed because driving it could bedangerous.

O Pressing the brake pedal with theengine stopped and/or low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as greater pedaltravel.

O If the brake fluid level is below theMIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir,do not drive until the brake systemhas been checked at an INFINITI re-tailer.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by an INFINITIretailer.

ABS component warning light:

The electronic component of ABS does notwork properly, if the light comes on togetherwith the anti-lock brake warning light when thebrake fluid is correct and the parking brake isreleased. Have the system checked by anINFINITI retailer. Drive vehicle at speeds andavoid abrupt braking.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the charging sys-tem is not functioning properly. Turn the en-gine off and check the alternator belt. If the belt

is loose, broken, missing or if the light remainson, see your INFINITI retailer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the belt isloose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors arenot closed securely while the ignition key isON.

Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. Ifthe light flickers or comes on during normaldriving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop theengine immediately and call an INFINITI re-tailer or other authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is notdesigned to indicate a low oil level. Use thedipstick to check the oil level. See “Engineoil” in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section.


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could causeserious damage to the engine almostimmediately. Turn off the engine as soonas it is safe to do so.

Low washer fluid warninglight

This light comes on when the washer tank fluidis at a low level. Add washer fluid as neces-sary. See “Window washer fluid” in the “8.Do-it-yourself” section.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten seatbelts. The light illuminates whenever the igni-tion key is turned to ON, and will remainilluminated until the driver’s seat belt is fas-tened.

See “Seat belts” in the “1. Seats, restraints andsupplemental air bag systems” section for pre-cautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warninglight

After turning the ignition key to the ON posi-tion, the supplemental air bag warning light willilluminate. The supplemental air bag warninglight will turn off after about 7 seconds if thesystem is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental front air bag, supplemental sideair bag and curtain side-impact air bag sys-tems, and pre-tensioner seat belt need servic-ing and your vehicle must be taken to yournearest authorized INFINITI retailer.

O The supplemental air bag warning lightremains on after approximately 7 seconds.

O The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

O The supplemental air bag warning lightdoes not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemen-tal Restraint System and/or the pre-tensionerseat belt may not function properly. For addi-tional information, see “Supplemental restraintsystem” in the “1. Seats, restraints and supple-mental air bag systems” section.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the supplemen-tal front air bag, supplemental side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag sys-tems and/or pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tem will not operate in an accident.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

or Automatictransmissionposition indicatorlight

When the ignition key is turned to the ONposition, the indicator in the tachometer showsthe automatic transmission selector lever po-sition. See “Driving with automatic transmis-sion” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

Cruise main switch indicatorlight

The light comes on when the cruise controlmain switch is pushed. The light goes outwhen the main switch is pushed again. Whenthe cruise main switch indicator light comes


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

on, the cruise control system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicatorlight

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If thelight blinks while the engine is running, it mayindicate the cruise control system is not func-tioning properly. Have the system checked byyour INFINITI retailer.

High beam indicator light(Blue)

This light comes on when the headlight highbeam is on and goes out when the low beam isselected.

Malfunction indicator lamp(MIL)

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes onsteady or blinks while the engine is running, itmay indicate a potential emission control mal-function.

The malfunction indicator lamp may also comeon steady if the fuel filler cap is loose ormissing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel.Check to make sure the fuel filler cap isinstalled and closed tightly, and that the ve-

hicle has at least three gallons (14 liters) of fuelin the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the lamp shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

Operation

The malfunction indicator lamp will come on inone of two ways:

O Malfunction indicator lamp on steady — Anemission control system malfunction hasbeen detected. Check the fuel filler cap. Ifthe fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tightenor install the cap and continue to drive thevehicle. The lamp should turn off aftera few driving trips. If the lamp doesnot turn off after a few driving trips, have thevehicle inspected by an authorizedINFINITI retailer. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the retailer.

O Malfunction indicator lamp blinking — Anengine misfire has been detected whichmay damage the emission control system.To reduce or avoid emission control systemdamage:

a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.c) Avoid steep uphill grades.

d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator lamp may stopblinking and come on steady.

Have the vehicle inspected by an autho-rized INFINITI retailer. You do not need tohave your vehicle towed to the retailer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation withouthaving the emission control systemchecked and repaired as necessarycould lead to poor driveability, reducedfuel economy, and possible damage tothe emission control system.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC systemor the traction control system is operating, thusalerting the driver to the fact that the roadsurface is slippery and the vehicle is nearingits traction limits.

Vehicle dynamics control offindicator light

The light comes on when the vehicle dynamics


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

control off switch is pushed to OFF. Thisindicates the vehicle dynamics control systemand traction control system are not operating.When the vehicle dynamics control off indica-tor light and slip indicator light come on withthe vehicle dynamics control system turnedon, this light alerts the driver to the fact that thevehicle dynamics control system’s fail-safemode is operating, i.e. the vehicle dynamicscontrol system may not be functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by yourINFINITI retailer. If an abnormality occurs inthe system, the vehicle dynamics control sys-tem function will be canceled but the vehicle isstill driveable. For additional information, see“Vehicle dynamics control system (VDC)” inthe “5. Starting and driving” section of thismanual.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The light flashes when the turn signal switchlever or hazard switch is turned on.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

The chime will sound if the driver’s side door isopened while the key is left in the ignitionswitch (ignition switch is turned off). Remove

the key and take it with you when leaving thevehicle.

Light reminder chime

The chime will sound when the front door isopened with the headlight switch on unless theignition key is in the ON position.

Make sure to turn the light switch off when youleave the vehicle.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-ings. When a brake pad requires replacement,it will make a high pitched scraping soundwhen the vehicle is in motion whether or notthe brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the warningsound is heard.

Your vehicle has two types of security sys-tems, as follows:

O Vehicle Security System

O Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown by thesecurity indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visualand audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicleare disturbed.

SECURITY SYSTEMS


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

How to activate the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows.

The system can be activated even if thewindows are open.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close and lock all doors, hood and trunk lid.

Lock all doors by pressing the LOCK buttonon the keyfob. When using the keyfob, thehazard indicators flash twice to indicate alldoors are locked.

4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator lightcomes on. The SECURITY indicator lightglows for about 30 seconds and then blinks.The system is now activated. If, during this30 second time period, the door is unlockedby the key or the keyfob, or the ignition keyis turned to ACC or ON, the system will notactivate.

Even when the driver and/or passengersare in the vehicle, the system will activatewith all doors, hood and trunk lid lockedand ignition key off. Turn the ignition key toACC to turn off the system.

Vehicle security system operation

The security system will give the followingalarm:

O The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

O The alarm automatically turns off after ap-proximately 1 minute. However, the alarmreactivates if the vehicle is tampered withagain. The alarm can be shut off by unlock-ing a door with the key, or by pressing theUNLOCK button on the keyfob.

The alarm is activated by:

O Opening the door without using the key orkeyfob.

O Opening the trunk lid without using the keyor keyfob.

O Opening the hood.

How to stop alarm

The alarm will stop only by unlocking a doorwith the key, or by pressing the UNLOCKbutton on keyfob. The alarm will not stop if theignition switch is turned to ACC or ON.

If the system does not operate as de-scribed above, have it checked by yourINFINITI retailer.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM

The Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of theregistered Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer Systemkey.

If the engine fails to start using the registeredInfiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System key, it maybe due to interference caused by anotherInfiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System key, anautomated toll road device or automated pay-ment device on the key ring. Restart the en-gine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

SIC1442


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition and wait approximately 10 sec-onds.

3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered Infiniti VehicleImmobilizer System key.

If this procedure allows the engine to start,INFINITI recommends placing the regis-tered Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer Systemkey on a separate key ring to avoid inter-ference from other devices.

Statement related to section 15 of FCCrules for Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem (CONT ASSY-BCM, ANT ASSY-IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device must ac-cept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired op-eration of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-

PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE MANUFAC-TURE RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCECOULD VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TOOPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light

If Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-functioning, this light will remain on while theignition key is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see your INFINITI retailerfor Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-vice as soon as possible. Please bring allInfiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System keysthat you have when visiting your INFINITIretailer for service.

SIC1442


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

The windshield wiper and washer operateswhen the ignition key is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper.

Intermittent operation can be adjusted by turn-ing the knob. Also, the intermittent operationspeed varies in accordance with the vehiclespeed. (e.g. When the vehicle speed is high,the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)

Pull the lever toward you to operate thewasher. Then the wiper will also operate sev-eral times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer so-lution may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead toan accident. Warm the windshield withthe defroster before you wash the wind-shield.

CAUTION

The following could damage the washersystem:

O Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

O Do not operate the washer if the res-ervoir tank is empty.

To defog/defrost the rear window glass andoutside mirrors (if so equipped), start the en-gine and push the switch on. The indicator lightwill come on. Push the switch again to turn thedefroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approximately 15minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window defroster.

SIC2024 SIC1831

WINDSHIELD WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCH

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)DEFROSTER SWITCH


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

XENON HEADLIGHTS (if soequipped)

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

O When xenon headlights are on, theyproduce a high voltage. To prevent anelectric shock, never attempt tomodify or disassemble. Always haveyour xenon headlights replaced at an

authorized INFINITI retailer.

O Xenon headlights provide consider-ably more light than conventionalheadlights. If they are not correctlyaimed, they might temporarily blindan oncoming driver or the driverahead of you and cause a seriousaccident. If headlights are not aimedcorrectly, immediately take your ve-hicle to an authorized INFINITI retailerand have the headlights adjustedcorrectly.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on,its brightness or color varies slightly. However,the color and brightness will soon stabilize.

O The life of xenon headlights will beshortened by frequent on-off operation.It is generally desirable not to turn offthe headlights for short intervals (forexample, when the vehicle stops at atraffic signal). Even when the daytimerunning lights are active (Canada only),the xenon headlights do not turn on.This way the life of the xenon headlightsis not reduced.

O If a xenon headlight bulb is close toburning out, the brightness will drasti-cally decrease, the light will start blink-ing, or the color of the light will becomereddish. If one or more of the abovesigns appear, contact an INFINITI re-tailer.

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

Turn the switch to the AUTO position:

When the ignition key is in the ON position, thetail lights, headlights, instrument lights andother lights turn on automatically, dependingon the brightness of the surroundings. The

SIC1834

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

headlights will automatically turn off 5 minutesafter the ignition switch is turned to the OFFposition and the driver’s or front passenger’sdoor is opened.

The headlight will also automatically turn off 45seconds after a front door is opened andclosed.

When the light switch is turned to the po-sition, the headlight low or high beam will turnoff.

Turn the switch to the position:

The front clearance, side marker, tail, licenseplate and instrument lights will come on.

Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all the other lightsremain on.

Be sure not to put anything on top of thephoto sensor located on the top left-handside of the instrument panel. The photosensor controls the autolamp; if it is cov-ered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is darkand the headlights will illuminate.

Battery saver system

O When the headlight switch is in the orposition while the ignition switch is in

the ON position, the lights (including thefront fog light) will automatically turn off 5minutes after the ignition switch has beenturned to the OFF position.

O When the headlight switch remains in theor position after the lights auto-

matically turn off, the lights will turn on for 5minutes when the headlight switch is turnedto the OFF position and turn to the or

position.

CAUTION

O Be sure to turn the light switch to theOFF position when you leave the ve-hicle for extended periods of time,otherwise the battery will go dead.

O Never leave the light switch on whenthe engine is not running for ex-tended periods of time even if theheadlights turn off automatically.

SIC1230


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control operateswhen the light switch is in the or

position.

Turn the control to adjust the brightness ofinstrument panel lights and clock (exceptpower window switch lights).When the control is turned upward until itstops, the light intensity will be at maximum.When the control is turned downward until itstops, the light will be turned off.

Headlight beam select

To select the high beam, push the lever for-ward. Pull it back to select the low beam.

Flashing signal

Pulling the lever toward you will flash theheadlight high beam.

Daytime running light system(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at areduced intensity when the engine is startedwith the parking brake released. The daytimerunning lights operate with the headlight switchin the OFF position or in the position.Turn the headlight switch to the positionfor full illumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before theengine is started, the daytime running lights donot illuminate. The daytime running lights illu-minate once the parking brake is released.The daytime running lights will remain on untilthe ignition switch is turned off.

WARNING

When the daytime running light systemis active, tail lights on your vehicle arenot on. It is necessary at dusk to turn onyour headlights. Failure to do so couldcause an accident injuring yourself andothers.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the turningdirection. When the turn is completed, the turnsignals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever upor down to the point where lights begin flash-ing.

SIC0922


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlightswitch to the position, then turn theswitch to the position. To turn them off,turn the switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on for the fog lights tooperate.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency con-ditions. All turn signal lights will flash.

Some state or provincial laws may prohibitthe use of the hazard warning flasherswitch while driving.

WARNING

O If stopping for an emergency, be sureto move the vehicle well off the road.

O Do not use the hazard warning flash-ers while moving on the highway un-less unusual circumstances forceyou to drive so slowly that your ve-hicle might become a hazard to othertraffic.

O Turn signals do not work when thehazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flasher can be actuated with the ignitionswitch either off or on.

SIC1836 SIC1447

FOG LIGHT SWITCH HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

To sound the horn, push on or near the hornmarks of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front airbag system may result in serious per-sonal injury.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.The switches located on the center consolecan be operated independently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

O For low heat, press the (Low) sideof the switch.

O For high heat, press the (High)side of the switch.

O For no heat, the switch has a center OFFposition between low and high.

The indicator light in the switch will illumi-

nate when low or high is selected.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.The indicator light will remain on as long asthe switch is on.

3. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, orbefore you leave the vehicle, be sure to turnthe switch to the off position (center).

CAUTION

O The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

O Do not use the seat heater for ex-tended periods or when no one isusing the seat.

O Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket,cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,the seat may become overheated.

O Do not place anything hard or heavyon the seat or pierce it with a pin orsimilar object. This may result indamage to the heater.

SIC1838 SIC1839

HORN HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately witha dry cloth.

O When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, thinner, or any similar ma-terials.

O If any abnormalities are found or theheated seat does not operate, turnthe switch off and have the systemchecked by your INFINITI retailer.

The vehicle should be driven with the VehicleDynamics Control (VDC) System ON for mostdriving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDCsystem reduces the engine output to reducewheel spin. The engine speed will be reducedeven if the accelerator is depressed to thefloor. If maximum engine power is needed tofree a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To cancel the Vehicle Dynamics Control Sys-tem (VDC), push the VDC OFF switch to turnoff the system. The indicator will comeon.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart theengine to turn ON the system. See “Vehicledynamics control system (VDC)” in the “5.Starting and driving” section.

SIC1832

VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL(VDC) OFF SWITCH


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

If the power supply is disconnected, theclock will not indicate the correct time.Readjust the time.

ADJUSTING THE TIME

To adjust the time, turn the adjusting knob.

The power outlet is for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones.

CAUTION

O Use caution as the socket and plugmay be hot during or immediatelyafter use.

O This power outlet is not designed foruse with a cigarette lighter unit.

O Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power

draw. Do not use double adapters ormore than one electrical accessory.

O Use this power outlet with the enginerunning. (If the engine is stopped,this could result in a discharged bat-tery.)

O Avoid using when the air conditioner,headlights or rear window defoggeris on.

O Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure to turn off the power

SIC1855 SIC1840A SIC1803

CLOCK POWER OUTLET


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

switch of the electrical accessory be-ing used or the ACC power of thevehicle.

O Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plugmay overheat or the internal tempera-ture fuse may blow.

O When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water to contact thesocket.

The cigarette lighter operates when the igni-tion switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Push the lighter in all the way. When the lighteris heated, it will spring out.

Return the lighter to its original position afteruse.

WARNING

The cigarette lighter should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

CAUTION

The cigarette lighter socket is a powersource for the cigarette lighter element

SIC1841A SIC2025

CIGARETTE LIGHTER ANDASHTRAY (accessory)


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

only. The use of the cigarette lightersocket as a power source for any otheraccessory is not recommended.

INSTRUMENT POCKET (Except forNavigation system equippedmodels)

WARNING

The instrument pocket should not beused while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

POCKET (Manual transmissionmodel)

SIC1843 SIC2026

STORAGE


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

GLASSES CASE

The glasses case can be opened by pushingthe button.

WARNING

The glasses case should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

CAUTION

O Do not use for anything other thanglasses.

O Do not leave glasses in the glassescase while parking in direct sunlight.The heat may damage the glasses.

CUP HOLDER

WARNING

The cup holder should not be used whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

Front:

For larger cups, remove the inside tray.

SIC1844 SIC1845A


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

O Avoid abrupt starting and brakingwhen the cup holder is being used toprevent spilling the drink. If the liquidis hot, it can scald you or your pas-senger.

O Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

Soft bottle holder

CAUTION

The bottle holder should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

GLOVE BOX

When locking or unlocking the glove box, usethe master key.

The glove box may be opened by pulling thehandle.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while drivingto help prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

SIC1846 SIC2028 SIC1849


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

UPPER GLOVE BOX (Except forNavigation system equippedmodels)

WARNING

Keep upper glove box lid closed whiledriving to help prevent injury in an acci-dent or a sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

WARNING

The center console box should not beused while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

SIC1848 SIC1847A SIC2027


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

REAR ARMREST POCKET

The pocket can store a first aid kit, etc.

CAUTION

Do not use for heavy articles.

CARGO NET

The cargo net helps keep packages in thecargo area from moving around while yourvehicle is driven.

To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to theretainers.

CAUTION

O Do not install the cargo net at the leftside of the trunk. It will hide thehandle of Interior Trunk Lid Release

mechanism.

O Avoid keeping heavy goods in thenet.

SIC1850 SIC1874


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Small cargo net (Sedan for Canada) COAT HOOK (Coupe)

CAUTION

Avoid hanging heavy goods on thehook.

STOWING GOLF BAGS

Normally, two standard golf bags can bestowed in the trunk. Insert the top of the golfbag into left side of the trunk room j1 then putthe bag forward j2 . Insert the top of the 2ndgolf bag into right side of the trunk room j3 andpull it in all the way j4 .

Depending on their sizes, in some cases itmay not be possible to store two golf bags.

SIC2078 SIC2077 SIC2031


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

O Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehiclewhile it is in motion and before clos-ing the windows. Use the windowlock switch to prevent unexpecteduse of the power windows.

O Do not leave children unattended in-side the vehicle. They could unknow-ingly activate switches or controlsand become trapped in a window.Unattended children could becomeinvolved in serious accidents.

The power windows operate when the ignitionkey is in the ON position and for about 45seconds, after the ignition key is turned to theOFF position. If the driver’s door or the frontpassenger’s door is opened during this periodof about 45 seconds, power to the windows iscanceled.

To open or close the window, push down orpull up the switch and hold it. The main switch(driver side switches) will open or close all thewindows.

SIC1851A SIC1978A

WINDOWS


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

The passenger side switch will open or closeonly the corresponding window. To open orclose the window, hold the switch down or up.

Locking passenger’s windows

When the lock button is pushed in, only thedriver side window can be opened or closed.Push it in again to cancel.

Automatic operation (For all doorwindows or front door windows, if soequipped)

To fully open or close the window, completelypress or lift the switch and release it; it neednot be held. The window will automaticallyopen or close all the way. To stop the window,just press or lift the switch in the oppositedirection.

Auto reverse function

If the control unit detects something caught ina window as it moves up, the window will beimmediately lowered.

SIC1852A SIC1892B SIC1853A


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

The auto reverse function can be activatedwhen a window is closed by automatic opera-tion when the ignition key is in the ON position,or for about 45 seconds after the ignition key isturned to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-diately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., in-side the vehicle before closing the win-dow.

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTINGFUNCTION (Coupe)

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed fromthe battery terminal, do not close eitherof the front doors. The automatic win-dow adjusting function will not work,and the side roof panel may be dam-aged.

The power window has an automatic adjustingfunction. When the door is being opened, thewindow is automatically lowered slightly toavoid contact between the window and theside roof panel. When the door is closed, thewindow is automatically raised slightly.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF

The sunroof will only operate when the ignitionkey is in the ON position.

The automatic sunroof is operational for about45 seconds, even if the ignition key is turned tothe OFF position. If the driver’s door or thefront passenger’s door is opened during thisperiod of about 45 seconds, power to thesunroof is canceled.

Sliding the sunroof

To fully open or close the sunroof, press theswitch to the CLOSE or OPEN side for lessthan 1 second and release it; it need not be

SIC1979A SIC1854

SUNROOF (if so equipped)


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

held. The roof will automatically open or closeall the way. To stop the roof, press the switchonce more while it is opening or closing.

To open or close the sunroof and stop on theway, press the switch to the CLOSE or OPENside for more than 1 second. The roof will stopwhen releasing the switch.

Auto reverse function (When closingthe sunroof)

If the control unit detects something caught inthe sunroof as it moves to the front, thesunroof will immediately open backward.

The auto reverse function can be activatedwhen the sunroof is closed by automatic op-eration when the ignition key is in the ONposition or for about 45 seconds after theignition key is turned to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the sunroofoccurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., in-side the vehicle before closing the sun-roof.

Tilting the sunroof (Sedan)

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then pressand hold the UP side of the switch. To tilt downthe sunroof, press and hold the DOWN side.

Tilting the sunroof (Coupe)

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then press theUP side of the switch and release it; it need notbe held. To tilt down the sunroof, press theDOWN side.

Sun shade

Open or close the sun shade by sliding itbackward or forward.

The shade will open automatically when thesunroof is opened. However, it must be closedmanually.

WARNING

O In an accident you could be thrownfrom the vehicle through an opensunroof. Always use seat belts andchild restraints.

O Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body outof the opening while the vehicle is inmotion or while the sunroof is clos-ing.

CAUTION

O Remove water drops, snow, ice orsand from the sunroof before open-ing.

O Do not place any heavy object on thesunroof or surrounding area.

If the sunroof does not close

If the sunroof does not close or open automati-cally, use the following procedure to returnsunroof operation to normal.


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Press the switch to the CLOSE/UP side totilt up the sunroof.

2. Press and hold the switch to theCLOSE/UP side for approximately 3 sec-onds while the sunroof is tilted up.

3. Release the switch once, then press andhold the switch to the CLOSE/UP sideagain for approximately 10 seconds untilthe sunroof moves automatically.

4. The sunroof will automatically open andthen close all the way.

If you failed at procedure 3. repeat all theprocedures from No. 1.

Have your INFINITI retailer check and repairthe sunroof. INTERIOR LIGHT

The interior light has a two-position switch.

When the switch is in the door position, thelight will illuminate when a door is opened.

The light will stay on for about 30 secondswhen:

O The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, akey or the power door lock switch while alldoors are closed.

O The driver’s door is opened and then closedwhile the key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

O The key is removed from the ignition switchwhile all doors are closed.

The light will turn off while the 30 second timeris activated, when:

O The driver’s door is locked either with thekeyfob, a key or the power door lock switch.

O The ignition switch is turned ON.

MAP LIGHT

When the switch is pushed in, the light will turnon. When the switch is pushed again, the lightwill turn off.

When the map light switch is in the ONposition, it will automatically turn off 30minutes after the ignition switch has beenturned to the OFF position. To turn on thelight again, turn the ignition switch to theON position.

The map, personal, and vanity mirror lights willautomatically turn off 30 minutes after thelatest operation of the following with the igni-tion switch in the ACC or OFF position:

O Opening or closing any door

O Locking or unlocking with the keyfob, a keyor the power door lock switch.

O Inserting or removing a key from the ignitionswitch

SIC1857

INTERIOR LIGHT


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

These lights will turn on again when any of theabove operations is performed after the lightshave turned off automatically. (The lights willturn off 30 minutes after the latest operation ofthe above as well.)

CAUTION

O Turn off the map, personal and vanitymirror lights when you leave the ve-hicle.

O Do not use for extended periods oftime with the engine stopped. Thiscould result in a discharged battery.

REAR PERSONAL LIGHT

The rear personal light has a three-positionswitch.

When the switch is in the door position, thelight will illuminate when the door is opened.

When the personal light switch is in the ONposition, it will automatically turn off 30minutes after the ignition switch has beenturned to the OFF position. To turn on thelight again, turn the ignition switch to theON position.

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on whenthe cover on the vanity mirror is opened.

When the vanity mirror light stays on, it willautomatically turn off 30 minutes after theignition switch has been turned to the OFFposition. To turn on the light again, turn theignition switch to the ON position.

SIC1858 SIC1859

VANITY MIRROR LIGHT (if soequipped)


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

The light illuminates when the trunk lid isopened. When the trunk lid is closed, the lightwill go off.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver pro-vides a convenient way to consolidate thefunctions of up to three individual hand-heldtransmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver:

O Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)devices such as garage doors, gates, homeand office lighting, entry door locks andsecurity systems.

O Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If the vehi-cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-nected, HomeLink will retain all program-ming.

Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiveris programmed, retain the original trans-mitter for future programming procedures(i.e., new vehicle purchases). Upon sale ofthe vehicle, the programmed HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver buttons should beerased for security purposes. For addi-tional information, refer to “ProgrammingHomeLink ” later in this section.

WARNING

O Do not use the HomeLink UniversalTransceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop andreverse features as required by fed-eral safety standards. (These stan-dards became effective for openermodels manufactured after April 1,1982). A garage door opener whichcannot detect an object in the path ofa closing garage door and then auto-matically stop and reverse, does notmeet current federal safety stan-dards. Using a garage door openerwithout these features increases therisk of serious injury or death.

O During programming, your garagedoor or gate may open or close. Makesure that people and objects are clearof the garage door or gate that youare programming.

O Your vehicle’s engine should beturned off while programming theHomeLink Universal Transceiver.

TRUNK LIGHT HomeLink UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

PROGRAMMING HomeLink

To program your HomeLink Transceiver tooperate a garage door, gate, or entry dooropener, home or office lighting, you need to beat the same location as the device. Note:Garage door openers (manufactured after1996) have “rolling code protection”. To pro-gram a garage door opener equipped with“rolling code protection”; you will need to use aladder to get up to the garage door openermotor to be able to access the “smart or learn”program button.

1. To begin, press and hold the 2 outerHomeLink buttons (to clear the memory)until the indicator light blinks slowly (after20 seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmit-ter 1-3 inches away from the HomeLinksurface.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously pressand hold both the HomeLink button youwant to program and the hand-held trans-mitter button.DO NOT release the buttons until step 4has been completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicatorlight on the HomeLink flashes, changingfrom a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashingblink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.When the indicator light flashes rapidly,both buttons may be released. The rapidlyflashing light indicates successful program-ming. To activate the garage door or otherprogrammed device, press and hold the

SIC1856 SIC1863


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

programmed HomeLink button - releasingwhen the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkblinks rapidly for two seconds and thenturns solid, HomeLink has picked up a“rolling code” garage door opener signal.You will need to proceed with the next stepsto train the HomeLink to complete theprogramming which may require a ladderand another person for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn”program button located on the garage dooropener’s motor to activate the “trainingmode”. This button is usually located nearthe antenna wire that hangs down from themotor. If the wire originates from under alight lens, you will need to remove the lensto access the program button.

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released theprogram button on the garage door open-er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, youhave 30 seconds in which to perform step7. Use the help of a second person forconvenience to assist when performingthis step.

7. Quickly within 30 seconds of pressing andreleasing the garage door opener program

button, firmly press and release theHomeLink button you’ve just pro-grammed. Press and release theHomeLink button up to three times tocomplete the training.

8. Your HomeLink button should now beprogrammed. (To program the remainingHomeLink buttons for additional door orgate openers, follow steps 2-8 only.

NOTE:

Do not repeat step one unless you want to“clear” all previously programmedHomeLink buttons).

If you have any questions or are having diffi-culty programming your HomeLink buttons,please refer to the HomeLink web site at:www.homelink.com or call 1-800-662-6200.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations requiredhand-held transmitters to stop transmitting af-ter 2 seconds. To program your hand-heldtransmitter to HomeLink , continue to pressand hold the HomeLink button (note steps 2through 4 under “Programming HomeLink ”)while you press and re-press (“cycle”) yourhand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until

the indicator light flashes rapidly (indicatingsuccessful programming).

NOTE:

If programming a garage door opener, etc.,it is advised to unplug the device duringthe “cycling” process to prevent possibledamage to the garage door opener compo-nents.

OPERATING THE HomeLinkUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver (onceprogrammed) may now be used to activate thegarage door, etc. To operate, simply press theappropriate programmed HomeLink Univer-sal Transceiver button. The red indicator lightwill illuminate while the signal is being trans-mitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink does not quickly learn thehand-held transmitter information:

O replace the hand-held transmitter batterieswith new batteries.

O position the hand-held transmitter with itsbattery area facing away from theHomeLink surface.


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

O press and hold both the HomeLink andhand-held transmitter buttons without inter-ruption.

O position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5inches (50 to 127 mm) away from theHomeLink surface. Hold the transmitter inthat position for up to 15 seconds. IfHomeLink is not programmed within thattime, try holding the transmitter in anotherposition - keeping the indicator light in viewat all times.

If you continue to have programming difficul-ties, please contact the INFINITI ConsumerAffairs Department. The phone numbers arelocated in the Foreword of this Owner’sManual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared, howeverto clear all programming, press and hold thetwo outside buttons and release when theindicator light begins to flash (approximately20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHomeLink BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Trans-ceiver button, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkbutton. Do not release the button until step4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to127 mm) away from the HomeLink sur-face.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitterbutton.

4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash,first slowly and then rapidly. When theindicator light begins to flash rapidly, re-lease both buttons.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttonhas now been reprogrammed. The new devicecan be activated by pushing the HomeLinkbutton that was just programmed. This proce-dure will not affect any other programmedHomeLink buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the

codes of any non-rolling code device that hasbeen programmed into HomeLink . Consultthe Owner’s Manual of each device or call themanufacturer or dealer of those devices foradditional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLink Univer-sal Transceiver with your new transmitterinformation.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part15. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference and (2) Thisdevice must accept any interference thatmay be received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

The transmitter has been tested and com-plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the device.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D.: CB2V67690


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys .......................................................................... 3-2Doors......................................................................... 3-3

Locking with key (Driver’s side) ........................... 3-3Windows open/close with key .............................. 3-3Locking with inside lock knob............................... 3-4Locking with power door lock switch.................... 3-4Child safety rear door lock ................................... 3-5

Remote keyless entry system................................... 3-5How to use remote keyless entry system............ 3-5Battery replacement ............................................. 3-8

Hood........................................................................ 3-10Trunk lid .................................................................. 3-10

Opener operation ............................................... 3-11Interior trunk lid release ..................................... 3-12Secondary trunk lid release ............................... 3-13

Fuel filler lid ............................................................. 3-14Opening the filler lid ........................................... 3-14Fuel filler cap...................................................... 3-14

Steering wheel ........................................................ 3-16Tilt operation....................................................... 3-16

Sun visors ............................................................... 3-16Mirrors ..................................................................... 3-17

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror (if soequipped)............................................................ 3-17Outside mirrors................................................... 3-18

Automatic seat positioner (if so equipped) ............. 3-19Automatic seat positioner operation................... 3-19Procedure for storing memory............................ 3-19Cancel switch ..................................................... 3-21

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

You can only drive your vehicle using themaster or valet keys which are registered tothe Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System compo-nents in your vehicle. These keys have atransponder chip in the key head. (The walletkey cannot be used to drive your vehicle.)

The master key and wallet key can be used forall the locks.

When the key case with the wallet key isplaced into your wallet, be careful not toapply excessive force to the wallet as it orother cards could be damaged.

The valet key cannot be used for the glove boxlock.

To protect belongings when you leave a keywith someone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.Record the key number on the key numberplate supplied with your keys and keep it in asafe place (such as your wallet), not in thevehicle. INFINITI does not record any keynumbers so it is very important to keep track ofyour key number plate.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMKEY — Master and Valet keys:The key number is necessary when you needextra Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System keys.As many as 5 Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem keys can be used with one vehicle. Newkeys must be registered to the Infiniti VehicleImmobilizer System components in your ve-hicle by your INFINITI retailer. At this time, youshould bring all Infiniti Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem keys that you have to your INFINITI

retailer for registration. This is because theregistration process will erase all memory ofany keys that are currently registered.

SPA1420

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seatbelts, this provides greater safety inthe event of an accident by helping toprevent persons from being thrownfrom the vehicle. This also helps keepchildren and others from unintention-ally opening the doors, and will helpkeep out intruders.

O Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.

O Do not leave children unattended in-side the vehicle. They could unknow-ingly activate switches or controls.Unattended children could becomeinvolved in serious accidents.

LOCKING WITH KEY (Driver’s side)

Power

The power door lock system allows you to lockor unlock all doors, trunk lid and fuel filler lidsimultaneously.

O Turning the driver’s door key to the front ofthe vehicle will lock all doors, trunk lid andfuel filler lid.

O Turning the driver’s door key one time tothe rear of the vehicle will unlock the driv-er’s door. From that position, returning thekey to neutral (where the key can only beremoved and inserted) and turning it to the

rear again within 5 seconds will unlock alldoors, fuel filler lid and trunk lid.

WINDOWS OPEN/CLOSE WITHKEY

Turn the driver’s door key to the unlock posi-tion and hold for about 1 second, all doorwindows will begin to lower.

To stop opening, turn the key to the neutralposition.

To close all door windows, turn the key to thelock position and hold for about 1 second.

To stop closing, turn the key to the neutralposition.

The rear door windows will operate 0.5 sec-onds after the front windows’ operation (if soequipped).

In the event of a hand in the way, or otherobstruction, the auto reverse function will acti-vate.

SPA1421

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Z 02.11.1/V35-D/V5.0 X

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOB

To individually lock the doors, move the insidelock knob to the LOCK position, then close thedoor. To unlock, pull up the inside lock knob tothe UNLOCK position.

When locking the door without a key, besure not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH

All door locks will be engaged when the powerdoor lock switch is moved to the LOCK posi-tion with the driver’s or front passenger’s dooropen. Then close the door and all doors will belocked.

When the power door lock switch is moved tothe LOCK position with front doors open whilea key is in the ignition switch, all doors will lockonce and then unlock automatically.

SPA1422 SPA0944D SPA1505A


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOORLOCK

Child safety locking helps prevent doors frombeing opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

When the lever is in the LOCK position, therear door can be opened only from theoutside.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, trunk lidand fuel filler lid and activate the panic alarmby using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.Before locking the doors, make sure thekey is not left in the vehicle.The keyfob can operate at a distance of ap-proximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (Theeffective distance depends upon the condi-tions around the vehicle.)As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with onevehicle. For information concerning the pur-chase and use of additional keyfob, contactyour INFINITI retailer.

The keyfob will not function when:

O the battery is dead,

O the distance between the vehicle and thekeyfob is over 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm and the trunk lid releasewill not activate when the key is in theignition switch.

CAUTION

The following conditions or occurrenceswill damage the keyfob.

O Do not allow the keyfob to becomewet.

O Do not drop the keyfob.

O Do not strike the keyfob sharplyagainst another object.

O Do not place the keyfob for an ex-tended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, INFINITIrecommends erasing the ID code of thatkeyfob. This will prevent the keyfob fromunauthorized use to unlock the vehicle.For information regarding the erasingprocedure, please contact an authorizedINFINITI retailer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

Setting hazard indicator and hornmode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and hornmode when you first receive the vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the

SPA0086

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRYSYSTEM


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicatorflashes twice and the horn chirps once. Whenthe UNLOCK button is pushed, the hazardindicator flashes once.

If hazard indicator and horn mode is not nec-essary, you can switch to hazard indicator onlymode by following the switching procedure.

In hazard indicator only mode, when the LOCKbutton is pushed, the hazard indicator flashestwice. When the UNLOCK button is pushed,neither the hazard indicator nor the horn oper-ates.

(Switching procedure)

Push the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on thekeyfob simultaneously for more than 2 sec-onds to switch from one mode to the other.

When pushing the buttons to set hazard indi-cator only mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3times.

When pushing the buttons to set hazard indi-cator and horn mode, the hazard indicatorflashes once and the horn chirps once.

Locking doors

1. Remove the ignition key.*1,*2

2. Close all the doors.*3

3. Push the LOCK button on the keyfob.

4. All the doors, trunk lid and fuel filler lid willlock.

All of the doors will lock when the LOCKbutton on the keyfob is pushed eventhough a door remains open and/or theignition key is in the ON position.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and thehorn chirps once.

O When the LOCK button is pushed with alldoors locked, the hazard indicator flashestwice and the horn chirps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

*1: Doors lock with the keyfob while a key is inthe ignition switch. However, the panicalarm and the trunk lid release will notactivate when the key is in the ignitionswitch.

*2: Doors lock with the keyfob while the igni-tion switch is in the ON position. However,the hazard indicator and horn will notfunction.

*3: Doors lock with the keyfob while any door

SPA1260


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

is open. However, the hazard indicatorand horn will not function.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfobonce.

O The driver’s door and fuel filler lid unlock

O The hazard indicator flashes once if alldoors are completely closed with the igni-tion key in any position except the ONposition.

O The interior light turns on and the light timeractivates for 30 seconds when the switch isin the DOOR position with the ignition key inany position except the ON position.

2. Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfobagain within 5 seconds.

O All doors unlock

O Trunk lid unlocks (For models equippedwith type B release switch on the lid, seelater in this section.)

O The hazard indicator flashes once if alldoors are completely closed.

All doors will be locked automatically unlessone of the following operations is performedwithin 1 minute of pressing the UNLOCK but-ton.

O any door is opened

O Trunk lid opens (For models equipped withtype B release switch on the lid, see later inthis section.)

O the ignition switch is turned to the ONposition

The interior light can be turned off withoutwaiting for 30 seconds by turning the ignitionswitch to the ON position or by locking thedoors with the keyfob.

Opening the windows

Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

The driver’s door will unlock.

SPA1433


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Continue to press the UNLOCK button for 3seconds. All the door windows will be lowered.

Continue to press the UNLOCK button untilwindows are fully open.

To stop lowering the windows, release theUNLOCK button.

To start lowering the windows, press the UN-LOCK button again for more than 3 seconds.

The rear door windows will operate 0.5 sec-onds after the front windows’ operation (if soequipped).

Releasing the trunk lid

1. Push the TRUNK button on the keyfob forlonger than 0.5 seconds with the key re-moved from the ignition key cylinder.

2. The trunk lid opens.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-ened, you may activate the alarm to call atten-tion as follows:

1. Push the PANIC button on the keyfob forlonger than 0.5 seconds with the keyremoved from the ignition key cylinder.

2. The theft warning alarm and headlights willstay on for 30 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

O It has run for 30 seconds, or

O The LOCK or the UNLOCK button ispressed, or

O The PANIC or the TRUNK button is pushedon the keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds.

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid using a suitable tool.

2. Replace the battery with a new one.

SPA1374


Z 02.11.1/V35-D/V5.0 X

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-lent

Make sure that the ! side faces thebottom case.

3. Close the lid securely.

4. Push the keyfob button two or three timesto check its operation.

See your INFINITI retailer if you need anyassistance for replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 4above.

O Be careful not to touch the circuit boardand the battery terminal.

O An improperly disposed battery canharm the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

O The keyfob is water-resistant; however,if it gets wet, immediately wipe it com-pletely dry.

O When changing batteries, do not let dustor oil get on the keyfob.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the manufacturer compliance

could void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment. This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: (1) This de-vice may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation of thedevice.


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Pull the hood lock release handle j1 lo-cated below the instrument panel; the hoodwill then spring up slightly.

2. Raise the lever j2 at the front of the hoodwith your fingertips and raise the hood.

3. Insert the assist bar into the slot j3 in thefront edge of the hood.

4. When closing the hood, reset the assist barto its original position, then slowly close thehood and make sure it locks into place.

WARNING

O Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving.Failure to do so could cause the hoodto fly open and result in an accident.

O If you see steam or smoke comingfrom the engine compartment, toavoid injury do not open the hood.

WARNING

O Do not drive with the trunk lid open.This could allow dangerous exhaustgases to be drawn into the vehicle.See “Precautions when starting anddriving” in the “5. Starting and driv-ing” section for exhaust gas.

O Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriouslyinjured. Keep the car locked with thetrunk closed when not in use, andprevent children’s access to car keys.

SPA1423

HOOD TRUNK LID


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

OPENER OPERATION

Type A

The trunk lid release switch is located at thebottom of the instrument panel.

Type B

The trunk lid release switch is located underthe trunk lid handle.

To open the trunk lid, unlock it with one of thefollowing operations then push the releaseswitch.

O Press the unlock button on the keyfobtwice.

O Insert the key into the door lock cylinderand turn the door key clockwise twice.

O Press the power door lock switch to theunlock side.

To close, push the trunk lid down securely.

The trunk lid release switch is linked with thefront passenger side door lock. To open thetrunk lid, unlock the front passenger side doorlock.

Cancel switch

When the cancel switch located inside theglove box is OFF, the trunk lid cannot beopened with the trunk lid release switch.

SPA1589 SPA1424A SPA1432


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with thetrunk closed, when not in use, and pre-vent children’s access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism pro-vides a means of escape for children andadults in the event they become locked insidethe trunk.

The handle is located on the back side of thetrunk lid inside the trunk compartment.

To open the trunk lid from the inside, pullthe release handle towards you until thelock releases and push up on the trunk lid.The release lever is made of a material thatglows in the dark after a brief exposure toambient light.

SPA1591 SPA1426A SPA1561


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

SECONDARY TRUNK LIDRELEASE

Sedan

The secondary trunk lid release mechanismallows opening of the trunk lid in the event of adischarged battery, etc.

The handle is located on the back side of thetrunk lid inside the trunk compartment.

Approach the handle through the interior trunkaccess hole (rear seat armrest).

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat,pull the release handle towards you until

the lock releases and push up on the trunklid.

Return the handle to the back side of the lid.Otherwise, it may cause water leaks in thetrunk.

Coupe

To open the trunk lid in the event of a dis-charged battery, operate the interior trunk lidrelease mechanism from the rear seat.

Fold down the rear seatback by pulling thestrap under the seatback sideways j1 . If nec-essary, pull the front of the rear seat cushionup and forward to remove the cushion j2 .

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat,pull the release handle towards you untilthe lock releases and push up on the trunklid.

SPA1590 SSS0237


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

OPENING THE FILLER LID

To open the fuel filler lid, unlock it using one ofthe following operations, then push the right-hand side of the lid (Sedan), the left-hand sideof the lid (Coupe).

O Press the unlock button on the keyfob once.

O Insert the key into the door lock cylinderand turn the door key clockwise twice.

O Press the power door lock switch to theunlock side.

To lock, close the fuel filler lid and lock thedoors.

FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Tightenthe cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks areheard.

Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder whilerefueling.

WARNING

O Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seri-

SPA1427B SPA1562 SPA1428A

FUEL FILLER LID


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

ously injured if it is misused or mis-handled. Always stop the engine anddo not smoke or allow open flames orsparks near the vehicle when refuel-ing.

O Fuel may be under pressure. Turn thecap a quarter turn, and wait for anyhissing sound to stop to prevent fuelfrom spraying out and possible per-sonal injury. Then remove the cap.

O Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically.Continued refueling may cause fueloverflow, resulting in fuel spray andpossibly a fire.

O Use only an original equipment typefuel filler cap as a replacement. It hasa built-in safety valve needed forproper operation of the fuel systemand emission control system. An in-correct cap can result in a seriousmalfunction and possible injury. Itcould also cause the malfunc-tion indicator lamp to come on.

O Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portablefuel containers:— Always place the container on the

ground when filling.— Do not use electronic devices

while filling.— Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you arefilling it.

— Use only approved portable fuelcontainers for flammable liquid.

O Never pour fuel into the throttle bodyto attempt to start your vehicle.

CAUTION

O If fuel is spilled on the car body, flushit away with water to avoid paint dam-age.

O Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks.Failure to tighten the fuel filler capproperly may cause the mal-function indicator lamp (MIL) to illu-minate. If the lamp illuminatesbecause the fuel filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle. The

lamp should turn off after a fewdriving trips. If the lamp doesnot turn off after a few driving trips,have the vehicle inspected by an au-thorized INFINITI retailer.

SPA1563


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

O For additional information, see the“Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)” inthe “2. Instruments and controls”section.

TILT OPERATION

Pull the lock lever and while holding down,adjust the steering wheel up or down to thedesired position.

Push the lock lever back into place to lock thesteering wheel in place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

SPA1429

SPA1592

STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

Store the main sun visor after storingthe extension sun visor.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)

WARNING

Use the AUTO position only when nec-essary, because it reduces rear viewclarity.

The inside mirror is designed so that it auto-matically changes reflection according to theintensity of the headlight of the following ve-hicle.

When the inside mirror is in the AUTO position,excessive glare from the headlights of thevehicle behind you will be reduced. When theswitch of the inside mirror is in the OFFposition, the inside mirror will operate nor-mally.

For HomeLink Universal Transceiver, see thedescription in the “2. Instruments and controls”section.

SPA1430

MIRRORS


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use inside mirror or glanceover your shoulder to properly judgedistances to other objects.

The outside mirror adjustment will operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Turn the control knob right or left to select theright or left outside mirror, then adjust.

Foldable outside mirrors

Push the outside mirror backward to fold it.

SPA1390 MPA0008


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

AUTOMATIC SEAT POSITIONEROPERATION

This system is designed so that the driver’sseat will automatically move when the auto-matic transmission selector lever is in the P(Park) position or when the parking brake isapplied (manual transmission model). This al-lows the driver to get in and out of the driver’sseat more easily.

When one of the following conditions is met,the driver’s seat will slide backward. (AT mod-els only)

O When the key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

O When the driver’s door is opened with thekey turned to ACC or LOCK.

O When the key is turned from ON to ACCwith the driver’s door open.

When one of the following conditions is met,the driver’s seat will return to the positionsbefore being set. (AT models only)

O When the key is inserted into the ignitionswitch.

O When the driver’s door is closed with thekey turned to LOCK.

O When the key is turned from ACC to ON

with the driver’s door open.

PROCEDURE FOR STORINGMEMORY

Two positions can be stored in the automaticdriver’s seat positioner memory. Follow theseprocedures to use the memory system.

1. AT models:Set the automatic transmission selectorlever to the P (Park) position.

M/T models:Apply the parking brake securely when thevehicle is stopped.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

3. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired posi-tions by manually operating each adjustingswitch. For additional information, see“Seats” in the “1. Seats, restraints andsupplemental air bag systems” section.

During this step, do not turn the ignition to

SPA1431

AUTOMATIC SEAT POSITIONER(if so equipped)


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

any positions other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for atleast 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed memoryswitch will come on and stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.After the indicator light goes off, the se-lected positions are stored in the selectedmemory (1 or 2).

If memory is stored in the same memoryswitch, the previous memory will be de-leted.

Confirming memory storage

O Turn the ignition ON and push the SETswitch. If the main memory has not beenstored, the indicator light will come on forapproximately 0.5 seconds. When thememory has stored the position, the indica-tor light will stay on for approximately 5seconds.

O If the battery cable is disconnected, or if thefuse blows, the memory will be canceled. Insuch a case, reset the desired positionsusing the following procedures.

1. Open and close the driver’s door more than

two times with the ignition key in the LOCKposition.

2. Reset the desired position using the previ-ous procedure.

Selecting the memorized position

1. A/T models:Set the automatic transmission selector le-ver to the P (Park) position.

M/T models:Apply the parking brake securely when thevehicle is stopped.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

3. Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for atleast 1 second.

The driver’s seat will move to the memo-rized position with the indicator light flash-ing. Then the light will stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds.

When memory switch 1 or 2 is pushed with thedriver’s door open and then the key insertedinto the ignition switch within approximately 1minute, the driver’s seat will move to thememorized position. (AT models only)

System operation

The automatic drive positioner system will notwork or will stop operating under the followingconditions:

O when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7km/h).

O when any two or more of the memoryswitches are simultaneously pressed whilethe automatic drive positioner is operating.

O when the adjusting switch for the driver’sseat is turned on while the automatic drivepositioner is operating.

O when the cancel switch is pushed to cancel.

O when the memory switch 1 or 2 is notpushed for at least 1 second.

O when the seat has already been moved tothe memorized position.

O when no seat position is stored in thememory switch.

O when the parking brake is not applied. —M/T models

O when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7km/h) while the parking brake is applied. —M/T modelsTo restart the drive positioner system,move the parking brake to off and on.


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

O when the engine is started while moving theautomatic drive positioner. — M/T models

CANCEL SWITCH

When the CANCEL side of the switch ispushed, the automatic drive positioner systemwill not function.

When the AUTO side of the switch is pushed,the system will function.


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

4 Heater, air conditioner and audiosystems

Ventilators ................................................................. 4-2Heater and air conditioner (Automatic) ..................... 4-3

Automatic operation ............................................. 4-4Manual operation.................................................. 4-4Dual zone button (if so equipped)........................ 4-5Ambient temperature............................................ 4-5Operating tips ....................................................... 4-5In-cabin microfilter ................................................ 4-5

Servicing air conditioner............................................ 4-6Audio system............................................................. 4-6

FM radio reception ............................................... 4-7

AM radio reception ............................................... 4-7Satellite radio reception........................................ 4-8Audio operation precautions ................................ 4-8FM-AM-satellite radio with cassette player andcompact disc (CD) changer................................ 4-11CD care and cleaning ........................................ 4-16Steering switch for audio control (if soequipped)............................................................ 4-17Antenna .............................................................. 4-17

Car phone or CB radio ........................................... 4-18

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.

Open or close, and adjust the air flow directionof ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that the ventsare closed when the vent switch ismoved down.

: This symbol indicates that the ventsare open when the vent switch ismoved up.

SAA0563 SAA0564

VENTILATORS

4-2 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. DEF button2. Rear window defroster button (Refer to the

“2. Instruments and controls” section.)3. Fresh air button4. Air recirculation button5. AUTO/ECON button

6. Temperature set button7. DUAL zone button (if so equipped)8. OFF button9. A/C button10.Manual air flow control button11.Manual fan control button

WARNING

O The air conditioner cooling functionoperates only when the engine is run-ning.

O Do not leave children, impairedadults, or pets alone in your vehicle.

On hot, sunny days, temperatures ina closed vehicle could quickly be-come high enough to cause severe orpossibly fatal injuries to people oranimals.

O Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause theinterior air to become stale and thewindows to fog up.

O Positioning of the heating or air con-ditioning controls should not be donewhile driving, so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

Start the engine and operate the controls toactivate the air conditioner.

SAA0569

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(Automatic)

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating(AUTO)

This mode may be normally used all yearround as the system automatically works tokeep a constant temperature. Air flow distribu-tion and fan speed are also controlled auto-matically.

1. Push the AUTO/ECON button on. (AUTOwill be displayed.)

2. If the A/C button indicator is off, push theA/C button to activate air conditioner. TheA/C button indicator will come on.

3. Push the temperature set button to set thedesired temperature.

O Adjust the temperature to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

O The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution and fan speed are alsocontrolled automatically.

Economical operation (ECON)Economical operation reduces some load tothe engine to improve the fuel economy. Itallows higher humidity than normal operation.

Pushing the AUTO/ECON button changes op-erations as follows while the A/C button indi-cator is on. AUTO → ECON → AUTO

Heating (A/C off)

The air conditioner does not activate. Whenyou need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Push the AUTO button. (AUTO will bedisplayed.)

2. Push the A/C button to turn off the airconditioner. The A/C button indicator willturn off.


O The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution and fan speed are alsocontrolled automatically.

O Do not set the temperature lower than theoutside air temperature. Otherwise the sys-tem may not work properly.

O Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Push the DEF button on. (The indica-tor light on the button will come on.)


O To quickly remove ice from the outside ofthe windows, push the manual fan controlbutton m and set to the maximum position.

O As soon as possible after the windshield isclean, push the AUTO button to return tothe auto mode.

O When the DEF button is pushed, theair conditioner will automatically be turnedon at outside temperatures above 23°F(−5°C) to defog the windshield, and the airrecirculate mode will automatically beturned off.

Outside air is drawn into the passengercompartment to improve the defogging per-formance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Push the fan control button . or m to manuallycontrol the fan speed.

Push the AUTO button to return to automaticcontrol of the fan speed.

Fresh air

Push the fresh air button to draw outside


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

air into the passenger compartment. The indi-cator light on the button will come on.

Air recirculation

Push the air recirculation button to recir-culate interior air inside the vehicle. The indi-cator light on the button will come on.

The air recirculation button will not be acti-vated when the air conditioner is in DEF mode.

Air flow control (MODE)

Pushing the MODE button selects the air outletto:

: Air flows from center and side ventila-tors.

: Air flows from center and side ventila-tors and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flows from defroster and foot out-lets.

To turn the system off

Push the OFF button.

DUAL ZONE BUTTON (if soequipped)

You can set the temperature of the driver and

front passenger sides individually.

Pushing the DUAL zone button changes thesetting position as follows:

Driver/Passenger → Driver → Passenger

If selecting the Driver/Passenger positionagain after the temperature is individually set,the display will show the temperature set forthe driver side.

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

The outside ambient temperature will beshown on the center display.

The ambient temperature sensor is located infront of the radiator. The sensor may be af-fected by road or engine heat, wind directionand other driving conditions. The display maydiffer from the actual outside temperature orthe temperature displayed on various signs orbillboards.

OPERATING TIPS

When the engine coolant temperature andoutside air temperature are low, the air flowfrom the foot outlets may not operate for amaximum of 150 seconds. However, this is nota malfunction. After the coolant temperaturewarms up, the air flow from the foot outlets willoperate normally.

The sensor on the instrument panel helpsmaintain a constant temperature; do not putanything on or around this sensor.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The air conditioning system is equipped with ain-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen,dust, etc. To make sure air conditioner heats,defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace thefilter in accordance with the maintenanceschedule in this manual. To replace the filter,contact your INFINITI retailer.

The filter should be replaced if air flowdecreases significantly or if windows fog

HA1011


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

up easily when operating the heater or airconditioning system.

The air conditioning system in your INFINITIvehicle is charged with a refrigerant designedwith the environment in mind. This refrigerantwill not harm the earth’s ozone layer. How-ever, special charging equipment and lubricantare required when servicing your NISSAN airconditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lu-bricants will cause severe damage to your airconditioning system. See “Capacities and rec-ommended fuel/lubricants” in the “10. Techni-cal and consumer information” section for airconditioning system refrigerant and lubricantrecommendations.

Your INFINITI retailer will be able to serviceyour environmentally friendly air conditioningsystem.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equip-ment.

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and pressthe POWER, FM or AM button to turn on theradio. If you listen to the radio with the enginenot running, the key should be turned to theACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other externalinfluences. Intermittent changes in receptionquality normally are caused by these externalinfluences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radioreception. These circuits are designed to ex-tend reception range, and to enhance thequality of that reception.

However there are some general characteris-tics of FM, AM and satellite radio signals thatcan affect radio reception quality in a movingvehicle, even when the finest equipment isused. These characteristics are completelynormal in a given reception area, and do notindicate any malfunction in your radio system.

Remember that a moving vehicle is not theideal place to listen to a radio. Because of the

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

movement, reception conditions will constantlychange. Buildings, terrain, signal distance andinterference from other vehicles can workagainst ideal reception. Described below aresome of the factors that can affect your radioreception.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (singlechannel) FM having slightly more range thanstereo FM. External influences may some-times interfere with FM station reception evenif the FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). Thestrength of the FM signal is directly related tothe distance between the transmitter and re-ceiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path,exhibiting many of the same characteristics aslight. For example they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away

from a station transmitter, the signals will tendto fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interferencefrom buildings, large hills or due to antennaposition, usually in conjunction with increaseddistance from the station transmitter, static orflutter can be heard. This can be reduced byadjusting the treble control counterclockwiseto reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and re-flected signals reach the receiver at the sametime. The signals may cancel each other,resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency,can bend around objects and skip along theground. In addition, the signals can bebounced off the ionosphere and bent back toearth. Because of these characteristics. AMsignals are also subject to interference as theytravel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for sev-eral seconds during ionospheric turbulenceeven in areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

SAA0306


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

power lines, electric signs and even trafficlights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION

When the satellite radio is first installed or thebattery has been replaced, the satellite radiomay not work properly. This is not a malfunc-tion. Wait more than 10 minutes with satelliteradio ON for satellite radio to receive all of thenecessary data.

AUDIO OPERATIONPRECAUTIONS

Cassette player

O To maintain good quality sound,INFINITI recommends using cassettetapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length.

O Cassette tapes should be removed fromthe player when not in use. Store cas-settes in their protective cases and awayfrom direct sunlight, heat, dust, mois-ture and magnetic sources.

O Direct sunlight can cause the cassette tobecome deformed. The use of deformedcassettes may cause the cassette to jamin the player.

O Do not use cassettes with labels whichare peeling and loose. If used, the label

could jam in the player.

O If a cassette has loose tape, insert apencil through one of the cassette hubsand rewind the tape firmly around thehubs. Loose tape may cause tape jam-ming and wavering sound quality.

O Over a period of time, the playbackhead, capstan and pinch roller may col-lect a tape coating residue as the tape isplayed. This residue accumulation cancause weak or wavering sound, andshould be removed periodically with ahead cleaning tape. If the residue is notremoved periodically, the player mayneed to be disassembled for cleaning.

Compact Disc (CD) player

O During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CD anddehumidify or ventilate the player com-pletely.

O The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

O The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment temperatureis extremely high. Decrease the tem-perature before use.

O Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

O Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

SAA0480


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

O CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,scratched, covered with fingerprints, orthat have pin holes may not work prop-erly.

O The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

• Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

• Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

• Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

O Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunction.

• 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

• CDs that are not round

• CDs with a paper label

• CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. CD EJECT button

2. CD play button

3. TAPE play button

4. Audio display

5. FM/AM band select button

6. SAT (satellite) channel select button

7. SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACKCHANGE button

8. POWER on/off button

9. CD LOAD button

10. Volume control button

11. AUDIO (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BAL-ANCE, SCV and NR (Dolby)) button

12. PTY (Program type)/CAT (Category) but-ton

13. RPT (repeat) play/DISP (Display) button

14. SCAN tuning button

15. Station and preset (FM/AM)/CD insert orCD play select button

16. AUTO.P (Automatic preset) button

17. TAPE EJECT button

18. RADIO TUNE/FFzREW/AUDIO (Bass,treble, fader, and balance, SCV and NR(Dolby)) ADJUSTING button

SAA0637


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

FM-AM-SATELLITE RADIO WITHCASSETTE PLAYER ANDCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER

Audio main operation

Head unit:

The radio has an FM diversity reception sys-tem, which employs two antennas printed onthe rear window. This system automaticallyswitches to the antenna which is receiving lessinterference.

The tape deck employs a permalloy headwhich allows for improved reproduction of highfrequency ranges. Noise is also greatly re-duced by the combined use of the Dolby NR(Noise Reduction) system. The auto loudnesscircuit enhances the low frequency range au-tomatically in both radio reception and tapeand CD playback.

POWER on/off:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenpush the POWER on/off button while the sys-tem is off to call up the mode (radio, tape orCD) which was playing immediately before thesystem was turned off. When no CD or tape isloaded, the radio will come on. While thesystem is on, pushing the POWER on/offbutton turns the system off.

Volume control:

Push the volume control button (VOL)(down) or (up) to adjust the vol-

ume.

This vehicle has Speed sensitive ControlVolume (SCV) for audio . The audio volumechanges as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADER,BALANCE, SCV and NR (Dolby)):

Press the AUDIO button to change the select-ing mode as follows.

BASS → TREBLE → FADER → BALANCE →SCV → NR (when cassette playing) → (Nor-mal) → BASS

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fader and Balance,press the AUDIO button until the desired modeBASS, TREBLE, FADER or BALANCE ap-pears in the display. Press the TUNE (or ) button to adjust Bass and Treble tothe desired level. Use the or buttonalso to adjust Fader or Balance modes. Faderadjusts the sound level between the front andrear speakers and Balance adjusts the soundbetween the right and left speakers.

To change the SCV mode to OFF, LOW, MIDor HIGH, press the or (TUNE) but-ton.

To change the NR (Dolby) mode to OFF orON, press the or (TUNE) buttonwhile cassette tape is playing. When Dolby isON, the display indicates the mark.

After 10 seconds, the radio, cassette tape orCD display reappears. Once the sound qualityis set to the desired level, press the AUDIObutton repeatedly until the radio, cassette tapeor CD display appears.

Dolby noise reduction manufactured under li-cense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Cor-poration. Dolby NR and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Metal or chrome tape usage:

The cassette player will be automatically set tohigh performance play when playing a metal orchrome cassette tape.

FM-AM radio operation

FM/AM band select:

Pushing the FM/AM band select button willchange the band as follows:

AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

When FM/AM band select button is pushedwhile the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON,


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

the radio will come on at the station lastplayed.

The last station played will also come on whenthe POWER button is turned to ON.

If another audio source is playing when theFM/AM band select button is turned to ON, theother audio source will automatically be turnedoff and the last radio station played will comeon.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broad-cast signal is weak, the radio will automaticallychange from stereo to monaural reception.

Satellite radio operation

SAT Satellite channel select:

Pushing the SAT channel select button willchange the band as follows:

SAT1 → SAT2 → SAT1

If you have not signed up for satellite radio, orif satellite radio receiver is not installed, “NOSAT” will be shown on the display.

When SAT channel select button is pushedwhile the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition, the radio will come on at the channellast played.

The last channel played will also come onwhen the POWER button is turned to ON.

If another audio source is playing when theSAT channel select button is turned to ON, theother audio source will automatically be turnedoff and the last channel played will come on.

TUNE (Tuning):

WARNING

The radio should not be tuned whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

Use these buttons for manual tuning. To movequickly through the channels, hold either of theTUNE buttons down for more than 0.5 sec-onds.

SEEK tuning:

For AM and FM radio:

Push the SEEK button or , to tunefrom high to low or low to high frequencies andstops at the next broadcasting station.

For satellite radio:

Push the SEEK button or to seek

channels of the next or previous category.

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from lowto high frequencies and stops at each broad-casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing thebutton again during this 5 seconds period willstop SCAN tuning and the radio will remaintuned to that station.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the nextstation.

(DISP) Display mode of satelliteradio:

O Pushing the RPT button will display addi-tional information about the satellite radiobroadcast (for example: Artist name, Title).

O Keep pushing the RPT button, and it willchange the information of the satellite radiobroadcast to be displayed as follows:CH Number → CH Name → Artist Name →Song Title → CH Number

Station memory operations:

Twelve stations/channels can be set for theFM band (six for FM1, six for FM2), twelve forsatellite radio (six for SAT1, six for SAT2) andsix stations can be set for the AM band.


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK,SCAN or TUNE button.

2. Select the desired station/channel andkeep pushing any of the desiredstation/channel memory buttons (1 to 6)until a beep sound is heard. (The radiomutes when the select button is pushed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come onand the sound will resume. Memorizing isnow complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the samemanner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if thefuse blows, the radio memory will be can-celled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Automatic preset:

To select the preset FM, AM, SAT or PTYstation/channel, push the AUTO.P button forless than 1.5 seconds.

To preset the FM, AM, SAT or PTYstation/channel, push the AUTO.P button formore than 1.5 seconds.

(CAT) Program type/category:

When the PTY button is pressed during FMmode, the PTY name of the current tunedstation is displayed.

When the PTY (CAT) button is pressed duringthe satellite radio mode, the category name ofthe current channel is displayed. During thistime if the PTY data code is zero, or the data isunreadable; the display will show NONE.

1. PTY (CAT) selection mode

PTY (CAT) name selection can be done bythe up/down TUNE button or inthe PTY (CAT) selection mode.

It is possible to shift the PTY (CAT) name byone step, with one push of the up/down tuningbutton or .

PTY name selection can also be achieved bypressing the preset buttons.

Initial PTY names are stored in the presetbuttons; but these can be changed by pressingthe preset buttons for more than 1.5 secondswhen the desired PTY name is in the display.

2. PTY SEEK tuning mode

After selecting a PTY name, push theSEEK button or within 10 sec-onds. Tuning to the PTY station will start. Ifyou do not push the SEEK button within the10 second period, the PTY mode will becanceled.

3. PTY SCAN tuning mode

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune thePTY name station, and stop at each broad-casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

button again during this 5 second period willstop SCAN tuning and the radio will remaintuned to that station. If the SCAN tuningbutton is not pushed within 5 seconds,SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenlightly insert the cassette tape into the tapedoor. The cassette tape will be automaticallypulled into the player.

The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and thecassette tape will begin to play.

CAUTION

Do not force the cassette tape into thetape door. This could cause player dam-age.

If the system is turned off by pushing theONzOFF/VOL control knob with the cassettetape still in the player, the tape will resumeplaying when the system is turned back on.

PLAY:

O When the TAPE button is pushed with thesystem turned off and a tape loaded, thesystem will come on and the tape will play.

O When the TAPE button is pushed witheither the radio or compact disc turned onand a tape loaded, the compact disc or theradio will automatically be turned off andthe tape will play.

O When the TAPE button is pushed with theTAPE playing, the tape will play the pro-gram recorded on the reverse side.

FF (Fast Forward), REW(Rewind):

Push the (fast forward) button to fastforward the tape. To rewind the tape, push the

(rewind) button. Either the FF or REWsymbol illuminates on the right side of thedisplay window. To stop the FF or REW func-tion, press the (fast forward) or (re-wind) again, or the TAPE button.

APS (AutomaticProgram Search) FF,APS REW:

When the (APS FF) button is pushedwhile the tape is being played, the next pro-gram will start to play from the beginning. Pushthe (APS FF) button several times to skipthrough programs. The tape will advance thenumber of times the button is pushed (up tonine programs).

When the (APS REW) button is pushed

once, the program being played starts overfrom the beginning. Push the (APSREW) button several times to skip back sev-eral selections. The tape will go back thenumber of times the button is pushed. Eitherthe FF or REW symbol flashes on the rightside of the display window while searching forthe selection.

This system searches for the blank intervalsbetween selections. If there is a blank intervalwithin one program or there is no intervalbetween programs, the system may not stop inthe desired or expected location.

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN tuning button while playing atape, and it will stop at the next tape programfor 5 seconds. Pushing the button again duringthis 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning andthe tape program is continued. If the SCANtuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds,SCAN tuning moves to the next tape program.

TAPE EJECT:

When this button is pushed with the tapeloaded, the tape will be ejected.When the tape is ejected while it is beingplayed, the system will be turned off.


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Compact disc (CD) changeroperation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand insert the compact disc into the slot withthe label side facing up. The compact disc willbe guided automatically into the slot and startplaying.After loading the disc, the number of tracks onthe disc and the play time will appear on thedisplay.If the radio or tape is already operating, it willautomatically turn off and the compact disc willplay.

CAUTION

Do not force the compact disc into theslot. This could damage the player.

If the system has been turned off while thecompact disc was playing, pushing theONzOFF/VOL control knob will start the com-pact disc.

3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs can alsobe used without an adapter.

button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the

LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Selectthe loading slot by pushing the CD insert selectbutton (1 to 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in succes-sion, push the LOAD button for more than 1.5seconds.

The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on thedisplay.

PLAY:

When the DISC (CD play) button is pushedwith the system off and the compact discloaded, the system will turn on and the com-pact disc will start to play.

When the DISC button is pushed with thecompact disc loaded with the tape or the radioplaying, the tape or radio will automatically beturned off and the compact disc will start toplay.

FF (Fast Forward), REW(Rewind):

When the (fast forward) or (rewind)button is pushed while the compact disc isbeing played, the compact disc will play whilefast forwarding or rewinding. When the buttonis released, the compact disc will return tonormal play speed.

APS (Automatic ProgramSearch) FF, APS REW:

When the (APS FF) button is pushedwhile the compact disc is being played, theprogram after the present one will start to playfrom its beginning. Push several times to skipthrough programs. The compact disc will ad-vance the number of times the button ispushed. (When the last program on the com-pact disc is skipped through, the first programwill be played.) When the (APS REW)button is pushed, the program being playedreturns to its beginning. Push several times toskip back through programs. The compact discwill go back the number of times the button ispushed.

CD PLAY button:

To change CD, push the CD play select button(1 to 6).

SCAN tuning:

When the SCAN tuning button is pushed forless than 1.5 seconds while the CD is beingplayed, the beginning of all the CD programs ineach track will be played for 10 seconds insequence.

When the SCAN tuning button is pushed formore than 1.5 seconds while the CD is beingplayed, the first program in all the CDs will be


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

played for 10 seconds.

Pushing the button again during this 10 sec-ond period will stop SCAN tuning.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the nextdisc program.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT button is pushed while thecompact disc is played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with thecompact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected.

To eject the discs selected by the CD selectbutton, push the EJECT button for less than1.5 seconds.

To eject all the discs, push the EJECT buttonfor more than 1.5 seconds.

When this button is pushed while the compactdisc is being played, the compact disc willcome out and the system will turn off.

If the compact disc comes out and is notremoved, it will be pulled back into the slotto protect it. (except 3.1 in (8 cm) diametercompact discs)

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the display whenthe CD is loaded with the system on.

CD CARE AND CLEANING

O Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch thesurface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.

O Always place the discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

O To clean a disc, wipe the surface from thecenter to the outer edge using a clean, softcloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circularmotion.Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

O A new disc may be rough on its inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges us-ing the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

SAA0451


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

STEERING SWITCH FOR AUDIOCONTROL (if so equipped)

The audio system can be operated using thecontrols on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ONposition, push the POWER switch to turn theaudio system on or off.

MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to change themode in the sequence of AM, FM1, FM2,SAT1, SAT2, CD and Tape.

Volume control switches

Push the volume control switch to increase ordecrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

Push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to change the radio fre-quency.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch or for morethan 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previousradio station.

APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APSREW (tape and CD):

Push the tuning switch or for less1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of thepresent program or skip to the next program.Push several times to skip back or skipthrough programs.

This system searches for the blank intervalsbetween selections. If there is a blank intervalwithin one program or there is no intervalbetween programs, the system may not stop inthe desired or expected location.

FF REW (tape or CD):

Push the tuning switch or for morethan 1.5 seconds to rewind or fast forward thetape or to change the playing disc up or down.

To stop the FF or REW function, press theor button for more than 1.5 sec-

onds again.

ANTENNA

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rearwindow.

CAUTION

O Do not place metalized film near therear window glass or attach any metalparts to it. This may cause poor re-ception or noise.

O When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window antenna.Lightly wipe along the antenna with adampened soft cloth.

SAA0567


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Satellite radio antenna

Satellite radio performance may be affected ifcargo carried on the roof rack blocks thesatellite radio signal. If possible, do not putcargo over the satellite radio antenna.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phonein your INFINITI, be sure to observe the fol-lowing cautions, otherwise the new equipmentmay adversely affect the Engine control sys-tem and other electronic parts.

WARNING

O A cellular telephone should not beused while driving so full attentionmay be given to vehicle operation.Some jurisdictions prohibit the use ofcellular telephones while driving.

O If you must make a call while yourvehicle is in motion, the hands freecellular phone operational mode (ifso equipped) is highly recommended.Exercise extreme caution at all timesso full attention may be given to ve-hicle operation.

O If a conversation in a moving vehiclerequires you to take notes, pull off theroad to a safe location and stop yourvehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

O Keep the antenna as far as possibleaway from the Engine Control Module(ECM).

O Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the Multiport FuelInjection harness. Do not route theantenna wire next to any harness.

O Adjust the antenna standing-wave ra-tio as recommended by the manufac-turer.

O Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

O For details, consult an authorizedINFINITI retailer.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving...................... 5-2Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).......................... 5-2Three way catalyst ............................................... 5-3Avoiding collision and rollover.............................. 5-3Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving....................... 5-4

Ignition switch............................................................ 5-4Automatic transmission ........................................ 5-4Manual transmission ............................................ 5-5Key positions ........................................................ 5-6Infiniti vehicle immobilizer system ....................... 5-6

Before starting the engine......................................... 5-7Starting the engine.................................................... 5-7Driving the vehicle..................................................... 5-8

Automatic transmission ........................................ 5-8Manual transmission .......................................... 5-12

Parking brake .......................................................... 5-14Cruise control .......................................................... 5-15

Precautions on cruise control............................. 5-15Cruise control operations ................................... 5-15

Break-in schedule ................................................... 5-17Increasing fuel economy ......................................... 5-17Parking/parking on hills ........................................... 5-18Power steering ........................................................ 5-19Brake system .......................................................... 5-19

Braking precautions............................................ 5-19Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ........................... 5-20

Vehicle dynamics control (VDC) system................. 5-21Cold weather driving ............................................... 5-23

Freeing a frozen door lock ................................. 5-23Anti-freeze .......................................................... 5-23Battery ................................................................ 5-23Draining of coolant water ................................... 5-23Tire equipment ................................................... 5-23Special winter equipment ................................... 5-23Driving on snow or ice ....................................... 5-24Engine block heater (if so equipped) ................. 5-24

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not leave children, impairedadults, or pets alone in your vehicle.They could accidentally injure them-selves or others through inadvertentoperation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,sunny days, temperatures in a closedvehicle could quickly become highenough to cause severe or possiblyfatal injuries to people or animals.

O Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriouslyinjured. Keep the car locked with thetrunk closed when not in use, andprevent children’s access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)

WARNING

Do not breathe exhaust gases; they con-

tain colorless and odorless carbon mon-oxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. Itcan cause unconsciousness or death.

O If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with allwindows fully open, and have thevehicle inspected immediately.

O Do not run the engine in closedspaces such as a garage.

O Do not park the vehicle with the en-gine running for any extended lengthof time.

O Keep the trunk lid closed while driv-ing, otherwise exhaust gases couldbe drawn into the passenger com-partment. If you must drive with thetrunk lid open, follow these precau-tions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation switchOFF and the fan control at 4 (high)to circulate the air.

O If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailerthrough the seal on the trunk lid orthe body, follow the manufacturer’srecommendation to prevent carbonmonoxide entry into the vehicle.

O If a special body or other equipmentis added for recreational or other us-age, follow the manufacturer’s rec-ommendation to prevent carbonmonoxide entry into the vehicle.(Some recreational vehicle appli-ances such as stoves, refrigerator,heaters, etc. may also generate car-bon monoxide.)

O The exhaust system and body shouldbe inspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumesare entering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust system.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

d. You have had an accident involv-ing damage to the exhaust system,underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE WAY CATALYST

The three way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Ex-haust gases in the converter are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

O The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, ani-mals or flammable materials awayfrom the exhaust system compo-nents.

O Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as drygrass, waste paper or rags. They mayignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

O Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline seriously re-duce the three way catalyst’s abilityto help reduce exhaust pollutants.

O Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause over-rich fuel flow into the three way cata-lyst, causing it to overheat. Do notkeep driving if the engine misfires, orif noticeable loss of performance orother unusual operating conditionsare detected. Have the vehicle in-spected promptly by an authorizedINFINITI retailer.

O Avoid driving with an extremely lowfuel level. Running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, damag-ing the three way catalyst.

O Do not race the engine while warmingit up.

O Do not push or tow your vehicle tostart the engine.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in lossof control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessivespeed, high speed cornering, or sudden steer-ing maneuvers, because these driving prac-tices could cause you to lose control of yourvehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of con-trol could result in a collision with othervehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle torollover, particularly if the loss of controlcauses the vehicle to slide sideways. Beattentive at all times, and avoid driving whentired. Never drive when under the influence ofalcohol or drugs (including prescription orover-the-counter drugs which may causedrowsiness). Always wear your seat belt. See“Seat Belts” in the “1. Seats, restraints andsupplemental air bag systems” section. Alsoinstruct your passengers to do so.

Starting and driving 5-3

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alco-hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstreamreduces coordination, delays reactiontime and impairs judgment. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likeli-hood of being involved in an accidentinjuring yourself and others. Addition-ally, if you are injured in the accident,alcohol can increase the severity of theinjury.

INFINITI is committed to safe driving. Youmust not drive under the influence of alcohol.Every year thousands of people are injured orkilled in alcohol related accidents. Althoughthe local laws vary on what is considered to belegally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!

And that’s true for drugs too (over the counter,prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if

your ability to operate your vehicle is impairedby alcohol, drugs, or some other physicalcondition.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

On automatic transmission models, the igni-tion lock is designed so that the key cannot beturned to LOCK and removed until the selectorlever is moved to the P (Park) position.

When removing the key from the ignition,make sure the selector lever is in the P (Park)position.

If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park)position, the key cannot be moved towardLOCK.

When the key cannot be turned toward the

SSD0083

IGNITION SWITCH


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

LOCK position, proceed as follows to removethe key:

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)position.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly in the ONdirection.

3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.

If the key is removed from the ignition switch,the selector lever cannot be moved from P(Park) position. The selector lever can bemoved if the ignition switch is in the ONposition and the foot brake pedal is de-pressed.

There is an OFF position in between LOCKand ACC, although it does not show on thelock cylinder. When the ignition is in OFF thesteering wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/6 of a turn counter-clockwise from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key tothe LOCK position. Remove the key. Tounlock the steering wheel, insert the keyand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to theLOCK position while driving. The steer-ing wheel will lock. This may cause thedriver to lose control of the vehicle andcould result in serious vehicle damageand/or personal injury.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

The switch includes an anti-theft steering lockdevice.

The ignition key can only be removed whenthe switch is in the LOCK position.

On manual transmission models, to turn theignition key to LOCK from ACC or ON, first turnthe key to OFF and turn the key to LOCK whilepushing the key in.In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/6 of a turn clockwisefrom the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to

SSD0082C


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

the LOCK position. Remove the key. Tounlock the steering wheel, insert the keyand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to theLOCK position while driving. The steer-ing wheel will lock. This may cause thedriver to lose control of the vehicle andcould result in serious vehicle damageand/or personal injury.

KEY POSITIONS

The switch includes an anti-theft steering lockdevice.

LOCK (Normal parking position) (0)

The ignition key can only be removed whenthe switch is in this position.

OFF (1)

The engine can be turned off without lockingthe steering wheel.

The ignition lock is designed so that the keycannot be turned to LOCK and removed until

the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)position.

ACC (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio when the engine is notrunning.

ON (Normal operating position) (3)

This position turns on the ignition system andthe electrical accessories.

START (4)

This position activates the starter motor, start-ing the engine.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM

The Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of theregistered Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer Systemkey.

If the engine fails to start using the registeredInfiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System key, it maybe due to interference caused by anotherInfiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System key, anautomated toll road device or automated pay-ment device on the key ring. Restart the en-gine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition and wait approximately 10 sec-onds.

3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered Infiniti VehicleImmobilizer System key.

If this procedure allows the engine to start,INFINITI recommends placing the registeredInfiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System key on aseparate key ring to avoid interference fromother devices.


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

O Maintenance items should be checked pe-riodically, e.g., each time you check engineoil.

O Check that all windows and lights are clean.

O Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also, check tires for properinflation.

O Lock all doors.

O Position seat and adjust head restraints.

O Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

O Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

O Check the operation of warning lights whenkey is turned to the ON (3) position.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission:

Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral). (P preferred.)

The starter is designed not to operate if theselector lever is in one of the driving posi-tions.

Manual transmission:

Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position,and depress the clutch pedal to the floorwhile cranking the engine.

The starter is designed not to operate un-less the clutch pedal is fully depressed.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by turning the ignitionkey to START. Release the key when theengine starts. If the engine starts, but failsto run, repeat the above procedure.

O If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/5 to the floor) and hold it thencrank the engine. Release the key and theaccelerator pedal when the engine starts.

O If the engine is very hard to start because itis flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all

the way to the floor and hold it. Crank theengine for 5 to 6 seconds. After crankingthe engine, release the accelerator pedal.Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by turning the ignitionkey to START. Release the key when theengine starts. If the engine starts, but failsto run, repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, turn the key off and wait 10seconds before cranking again, other-wise the starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30seconds after starting. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially incold weather.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

5 speed automatic transmission

The automatic transmission in your vehicle iselectronically controlled by a transmission con-trol module to produce maximum power andsmooth operation.

Shown on the following pages are the recom-mended operating procedures for this trans-mission. Follow these procedures for maxi-mum vehicle performance and drivingenjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the footbrake pedal and push the selector lever buttonbefore shifting the selector lever to the R(Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or Manualshift mode position. Be sure the vehicle is fullystopped before attempting to shift the selectorlever.

This automatic transmission model is de-signed so that the foot brake pedal must bedepressed before shifting from P (Park) toany drive position while the ignition switchis ON.

The selector lever cannot be moved out ofP (Park) position and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition key is turned

to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if thekey is removed from the switch.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andpush the selector lever button to shift into adriving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and foot brake,then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

O Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) ormanual shift mode. Always depressthe brake pedal until shifting is com-pleted. Failure to do so could causeyou to lose control and have an acci-dent.

O Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forwardor reverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

O On slippery roads, do not downshift.This may cause a loss of control.

O Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)

while vehicle is moving forward.Never shift to P (Park) or D (Drive)while vehicle is moving rearward.These could cause an accident.

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by de-pressing the accelerator pedal. The footbrakes should be used for this purpose.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

To move the selector lever,

: Push the button while depressing thebrake pedal,

: Push the button,: Just move the selector lever.

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress thebrake pedal and shift the selector lever from P(Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive),or Manual shift mode position.

Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R(Reverse). All other positions can be selectedwithout pushing the button.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selectorlever is in any position while the engineis not running. Failure to do so couldcause the vehicle to move unexpectedlyor roll away and result in serious per-sonal injury and/or property damage.

If the key is turned to OFF or ACC for anyreason while the vehicle is in R (Reverse), N(Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the keycannot be turned to LOCK and be removedfrom the ignition switch. Move the selectorlever to P (Park) position, then the key can beturned to LOCK.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle isparked or when starting the engine. Make surethe vehicle is completely stopped. The brakepedal must be depressed and the selectorlever button pushed in to move the selectorlever from N (Neutral) or any drive positionto P (Park). Apply the parking brake. Whenparking on a hill, apply the parking brake first,then move the lever to the P (Park) position.

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicleis completely stopped.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Always be surethe vehicle is completely stopped before se-lecting R (Reverse). The brake pedal mustbe depressed and the selector lever buttonpushed in to move the selector lever from P(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R(Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.The engine can be started in this position. Youmay shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalledengine while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Manual shift mode (Sedan)

When the selector lever is shifted from D to themanual shift gate with the vehicle stopped orwhile driving, the transmission enters the

SSD0240


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

manual shift mode. Shift range can be se-lected manually.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range isdisplayed on the position indicator in themeter. When shifting the selector lever to themanual shift gate, the position indicator firstdisplays 4M (4th).

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

1M →← 2M →

← 3M →← 4M →

← 5M

5M (5th):


4M (4th):

For driving up or down long slopes whereengine braking would be advantageous.

3M (3rd) and 2M (2nd):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.

1M (1st):

Use this position when climbing steep hillsslowly or driving slowly through deep snow,sand or mud, or for maximum engine brakingon steep downhill grades.

O Remember not to drive at high speeds forextended periods of time in lower than 4M

range. This reduces the fuel economy.

O When shifting up, move the selector lever tothe + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.)

O When shifting down, move the selectorlever to the − (down) side. (Shifts to lowerrange.)

O The transmission will automatically shift thegears between the 1st and the selectedrange. (For example, if you select the 3rdrange, the transmission will shift up or downbetween 1st, 2nd and 3rd gears.

O Moving the selector lever rapidly to thesame side twice will shift the ranges insuccession.

O When canceling the manual shift mode,return the selector lever to the D position.The transmission returns to the normaldriving mode.

O In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may not shift to the selected gear.This helps maintain driving performanceand reduces the chance of vehicle dam-age or loss of control.

O In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may shift up automatically over theselected range, if the engine is revvedup to the hazardous speed. When thevehicle speed decreases, the transmis-sion automatically shifts down and

shifts to 1st gear before the vehiclecomes to a stop.

Manual shift mode (Coupe)

When the selector lever is shifted from D to themanual shift gate with the vehicle stopped orwhile driving, the transmission enters themanual shift mode. Shift range can be se-lected manually.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range isdisplayed on the position indicator in themeter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

M1→← M2

→← M3

→← M4

→← M5

M5 (5th):


M4 (4th):

For driving up or down long slopes whereengine braking would be advantageous.

M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.

M1 (1st):

Use this position when climbing steep hillsslowly or driving slowly through deep snow,


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

sand or mud, or for maximum engine brakingon steep downhill grades.

O Remember not to drive at high speeds forextended periods of time in lower than M4range. This reduces the fuel economy.

O When shifting up, move the selector lever tothe + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.)

O When shifting down, move the selectorlever to the − (down) side. (Shifts to lowerrange.)

O Moving the selector lever to the same sidetwice will shift the ranges in succession.However, if this motion is rapidly done, thesecond shifting may not be completed prop-erly.

O In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion automatically shifts down to 1stgear before the vehicle comes to a stop.When accelerating again, it is necessaryto shift up to the desired range.

O When canceling the manual shift mode,return the selector lever to the D position.The transmission returns to the normaldriving mode.

O In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may not shift to the selected gear.This helps maintain driving performance

and reduces the chance of vehicle dam-age or loss of control.

Accelerator downshift— In D position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depress theaccelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts thetransmission down into the lower gear, de-pending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, the nexttime the key is turned to the ON position, the

light will blink for approximately 8 sec-onds after coming on for 2 seconds. While thevehicle can be driven under these circum-stances please note that the gears in theautomatic transmission will be locked in 4thgear.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-ditions, such as excessive wheel spinningand subsequent hard braking, the fail-safesystem may be activated. This will occureven if all electrical circuits are functioningproperly. In this case, turn the ignition keyOFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn thekey back to the ON position. The vehicleshould return to its normal operating con-dition. If it does not return to its normaloperating condition, have your INFINITI re-

tailer check the transmission and repair ifnecessary.


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, theselector lever may not be moved from the P(Park) position even with the brake pedaldepressed.

To move the selector lever, apply the parkingbrake, depress the brake pedal, and push theshift lock release button. The selector levercan be moved to N (Neutral). This allows thevehicle to be moved if the battery is dis-charged.

If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park),have your INFINITI retailer check the auto-

matic transmission system as soon as pos-sible.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Shifting

To change gears, or when up shifting or downshifting fully depress the clutch pedal, shift intothe appropriate gear then slowly and smoothlyrelease the clutch.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd,3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in sequence accord-ing to the vehicle speed.

To back up, depress the shift lever and thenmove it to the R (Reverse) position after stop-ping the vehicle completely.

SSD0298 SSD0287


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R(Reverse) or 1 (Low gear), shift into N (Neu-tral), then release the clutch pedal and shiftinto R or 1 again.

WARNING

O Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of con-trol.

O Do not over-rev the engine whenshifting to a lower gear. This maycause a loss of control or enginedamage.

CAUTION

O Do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal while driving. This may damagethe clutch.

O Stop your vehicle completely beforeshifting into R (Reverse).

O When the vehicle is stopped for aperiod of time, for example at a stoplight, shift to N (Neutral) and release

the clutch pedal with the foot brakeapplied.

Suggested up-shift speeds

Shown below are suggested vehicle speedsfor shifting into a higher gear. These sugges-tions relate to fuel economy and vehicle per-formance. Actual up-shift speeds will vary ac-cording to road conditions, the weather andindividual driving habits.

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas[less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)1st to 2nd 8 (13)2nd to 3rd 16 (26)3rd to 4th 25 (40)4th to 5th 28 (45)5th to 6th 33 (53)

For quick acceleration in low altitude areas orin high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)1st to 2nd 15 (24)2nd to 3rd 25 (40)3rd to 4th 40 (64)4th to 5th 45 (72)5th to 6th 50 (80)

Suggested maximum speed in eachgear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is notrunning smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed(shown below) in any gear. For level roaddriving, use the highest gear suggested forthat speed. Always observe posted speedlimits, and drive according to the road condi-tions, which will ensure safe operation. Do notover-rev the engine when shifting to a lowergear as it may cause engine damage or loss ofvehicle control.

Gear MPH (km/h)1st 35 (56)2nd 60 (96)3rd 85 (136)4th —5th —6th —


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Automatic transmission model

To apply: Fully depress the parking brakepedal.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Depress the parking brake pedal and theparking brake will be released.

3. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

Manual transmission model

To apply: Pull the lever up.

To release:

1. Firmly apply foot brake.

2. Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)position.

3. While pulling up on the lever slightly, pushthe button and lower completely.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

WARNING

O Be sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving. Failure to doso can cause brake failure and lead toan accident.

O Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

O Do not use the gear shift in place ofthe parking brake. When parking, besure the parking brake is fully en-gaged.

O Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the park-ing brake and cause an accident.

SPA1286 PD1001M

PARKING BRAKE


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driv-ing under the following conditions:

O it is not possible to keep the vehicleat a set speed.

O in heavy traffic or in traffic that variesin speed.

O on winding or hilly roads.

O on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,etc.).

O in very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do notshift into N (Neutral) without depressingthe clutch pedal when the cruise controlis set. Should this occur, depress theclutch pedal and turn the main switch offimmediately. Failure to do so may cause

engine damage.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

O If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight on the meter panel then blinks to warnthe driver.

O If the engine coolant temperature becomesexcessively high, the cruise control systemwill be canceled automatically.

O If the SET indicator light blinks, turn thecruise control main switch off and have thesystem checked by your INFINITI retailer.

O The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control main switch is turned onwhile pushing the RES/ACCEL, COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (located on thesteering wheel). To properly set the cruisecontrol system, perform the precedingsteps in the order indicated.

1. RESUME or ACCEL switch

2. COAST or SET switch

3. ON/OFF switch

4. CANCEL switch

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speedbetween 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)without keeping your foot on the acceleratorpedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the mainswitch on. The CRUISE indicator light on themeter panel will come on.

SSD0297

CRUISE CONTROL


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

To set at cruising speed, accelerate yourvehicle to the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it. (The SETindicator light will come on.) Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will main-tain the set speed.

O To pass another vehicle, depress theaccelerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle will return to the previ-ously set speed.

O The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, follow either ofthese three methods:

a) Push the cancel switch; The SET indicatorlight will go out.

b) Tap the brake pedal; The SET indicatorlight will go out.

c) Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISEindicator and SET indicator lights will goout.

O If you depress the brake pedal while push-ing the RES/ACCEL set switch and reset atthe cruising speed, turn the main switch offonce and then turn it on again.

O The cruise control will automatically be can-

celled if the vehicle slows down belowapproximately 8 MPH (13 km/h).

O Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmis-sion), or move the selector lever to N (Neu-tral) position (automatic transmission). TheSET indicator light will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods:

a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

b) Push and hold the RES/ACCEL set switch.When the vehicle attains the speed youdesire, release the switch.

c) Push, then quickly release the RES/ACCELset switch. Each time you do this, the setspeed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods:

a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

b) Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.Release the switch when the vehicle slowsdown to the desired speed.

c) Push, then quickly release the COAST/SET switch. Each time you do this, the setspeed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the RES/ACCEL set switch. The vehiclewill resume the last set cruising speed whenthe vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), followthese recommendations to obtain maximumengine performance and ensure the futurereliability and economy of your new vehicle.Failure to follow these recommendations mayresult in shortened engine life and reducedengine performance.

O Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow. Do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

O Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

O Avoid quick starts.

O Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

O Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km).

O Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintaincruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

O Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed will lower fueleconomy.

O Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-hicles.

O Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

O Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

O Keep your engine tuned up.

O Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

O Keep the tires inflated at the correct pres-sure. Low pressure will increase tire wearand waste fuel.

O Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.Improper alignment will cause not only tirewear but also lower fuel economy.

O Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

O When cruising at highway speeds, it ismore economical to use the air conditionerand leave the windows closed to reducedrag.

SD1001M

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as drygrass, waste paper or rags. They mayignite and cause a fire.

O Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.

O Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)position.

Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse)position. When parking on an uphill grade,place the shift lever in the 1 (Low gear)position.

WARNING

O Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park) forautomatic transmission models or inan appropriate gear for manual trans-mission models. Failure to do socould cause the vehicle to move un-expectedly or roll away and result inan accident.

O Make sure the automatic transmis-sion selector lever has been pushedas far forward as it can go and cannotbe moved without depressing thebutton at the end of the lever.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intothe street when parked on a sloping driveway, it is a good practice to turn the wheelsas illustrated.

O HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: j1

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

MSD0002

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

O HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: j2

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

O HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: j3

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from thecenter of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key.

The power assisted steering is designed touse a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, toassist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, youwill still have control of the vehicle. However,much greater steering effort is needed, espe-cially in sharp turns or at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist for thesteering will not work. Steering will bemuch harder to operate.

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at two wheels.

Vacuum assisted brake

The brake booster aids braking by using en-gine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stopthe vehicle by depressing the brake pedal.However, greater foot pressure on the brakepedal will be required to stop the vehicle andthe stopping distance will be longer.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result,your braking distance will be longer and thevehicle may pull to one side during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakesreturn to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle athigh speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedalwhile driving. This overheats the brakes, in-creases wear on the brake linings and pads,and reduces gas mileage.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

To help save the brakes and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could resultin loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

O While driving on a slippery surface,be careful when braking, acceleratingor downshifting. Abrupt braking oraccelerating could cause the wheelsto skid and result in an accident.

O If the engine is not running or isturned off while driving, the powerassist for the brakes will not work.Braking will be harder.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakesat each wheel so the wheels will not lock whenbraking abruptly or when braking on slipperysurfaces. The system detects the rotationspeed at each wheel and varies the brake fluidpressure to prevent each wheel from lockingand sliding. By preventing wheel lockup, thesystem helps the driver maintain steering con-

trol and helps to minimize swerving and spin-ning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stopping dis-tances.

Normal operation

The anti-lock brake system will not operate atspeeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) tocompletely stop the vehicle. (The speeds willvary according to road conditions.) When theanti-lock system senses that one or morewheels are close to locking up, the actuator(under the hood) rapidly applies and releaseshydraulic pressure (like pumping the brakesvery quickly). While the actuator is working,you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedaland hear a noise or vibration from the actuatorunder the hood. This is normal and indicatesthat the anti-lock system is working properly.However, the pulsation may indicate that road

conditions are hazardous and extra care isrequired while driving.

Self-test feature

The anti-lock brake system consists of elec-tronic sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulicsolenoids controlled by a computer. The com-puter has a built-in diagnostic feature that teststhe system each time you start the engine andmove the vehicle at a low speed in forward orreverse. When the self-test occurs, you mayhear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation inthe brake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of any malfunction. If the computersenses any malfunction, it switches the anti-lock brake system OFF and turns on the ABSwarning light in the dashboard. The brakesystem will then behave normally, but withoutanti-lock assistance.

If the light comes on during the self check, orwhile you are driving, you should take yourvehicle to your INFINITI retailer for repair atyour earliest convenience.

WARNING

The anti-lock brake system is a sophis-ticated device, but it cannot prevent ac-


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

cidents resulting from careless or dan-gerous driving techniques. It can helpmaintain vehicle control during brakingon slippery surfaces, but remember thatthe stopping distance on slippery sur-faces will be longer than on normalsurfaces, even with the anti-lock sys-tem. Stopping distances may also belonger on rough, gravel or snow coveredroads, or if you are using tire chains.Always maintain a safe distance fromthe vehicle in front of you. Ultimately,the responsibility for safety of yourselfand others rests in the hands of thedriver.

Tire type and condition of tires may alsoaffect braking effectiveness.

O When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

O When installing a spare tire, makesure it is the proper size and type asspecified on the tire placard. See “Ve-hicle identification” in the “10. Tech-nical and consumer information” sec-

tion for tire placard location.When driving on slippery surfaces or suddenlyavoiding obstacles on roads, the vehicle mightswerve or slip. With the vehicle dynamicscontrol (VDC) system, sensors detect thesemovements and control the braking and en-gine output to help improve vehicle stabilitywhile driving.

O When the vehicle dynamics control systemis operating, the slip indicator in the instru-ment panel blinks.

O When only the traction control system por-tion of the vehicle dynamics control systemis operating, the slip indicator will also blink.

O If the slip indicator blinks, the vehicle isunder slippery conditions. Be sure to drivecarefully. See “Slip indicator light”, and “Ve-hicle dynamics control off indicator light” inthe “2. Instruments and controls” section.

O Indicator lightIf a malfunction occurs in the system, theSLIP and indicator lights come on inthe meter panel.As long as these warning lights are on, thetraction control function is canceled.

The VDC system uses a Brake Limited SlipDifferential (LSD) system to improve vehicletraction. The brake LSD system works whenone of the driving wheels is spinning on a

VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL(VDC) SYSTEM


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

slippery surface. The brake LSD systembrakes the spinning wheel which distributesthe driving power to the other drive wheel. Ifthe vehicle is operated with the vehicle dynam-ics control system turned off, all VDC and TCSfunctions will be turned off. The brake LSDsystem and ABS will still operate with the VDCsystem off. If the brake LSD system or the ABSis activated, the slip indicator light will blink andyou may hear a clunk noise and/or feel apulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal.

While the VDC system is operating, you mayfeel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear anoise or vibration from under the hood. This isnormal and indicates that the VDC system isworking properly.

The computer has a built in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you start theengine and move the vehicle forward or inreverse at a slow speed. When the self-testoccurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feela pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normaland is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

O The vehicle dynamics control systemis designed to help improve driving

stability but does not prevent acci-dents due to abrupt steering opera-tion at high speeds or by careless ordangerous driving techniques. Re-duce vehicle speed and be especiallycareful when driving and corneringon slippery surfaces and always drivecarefully.

O If suspension parts such as shockabsorbers, struts, springs and bush-ings are not standard equipment orare extremely deteriorated, the ve-hicle dynamics control off indicatorlight may come on.

O When driving on extremely inclinedsurfaces such as higher banked cor-ners, the vehicle dynamics controlsystem may not operate properly orthe vehicle dynamics control off indi-cator light may come on. Do not driveon these types of roads.

O If the tires other than the recom-mended ones are used, the vehicledynamics control system may not op-erate properly or the vehicle dynam-

ics control off indicator light maycome on.

O The vehicle dynamics control systemis not a substitute for winter tires ortire chains on a snow covered road.


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, applyde-icer or glycerin to it through the key hole. Ifthe lock becomes frozen, heat the key beforeinserting it into the key hole.

ANTI-FREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that thetemperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), checkanti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.For additional information, see “Engine Cool-ing System” in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during ex-tremely cold weather conditions, the batteryfluid may freeze and damage the battery. Tomaintain maximum efficiency, the batteryshould be checked regularly. For additionalinformation, see “Battery” in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside withoutanti-freeze, drain the cooling system by open-ing the drain plug located under the radiator.Refill before operating the vehicle. See “En-gine cooling system” in the “8. Do-it-yourself”section for changing engine coolant.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate yourvehicle on snowy or icy roads, INFINITIrecommends the use of MUD & SNOW orALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.Please consult your INFINITI retailer for thetire type, size, speed rating and availabilityinformation.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some prov-inces and states prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before in-stalling studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used if desired. Makesure they are of proper size for the tires onyour vehicle and are installed according tothe chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Useof tire chains may be prohibited accordingto location. Check the local laws beforeinstalling tire chains. When installing tirechains, make sure they are of proper sizefor the tires on your vehicle and are in-

stalled according to the chain manufactur-er’s suggestions. Use only SAE Class Schains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S”chains are designed to meet the SAE stan-dard minimum clearances between the tireand the closest vehicle suspension or bodycomponent required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chainsor cables). The minimum clearances aredetermined using the factory equipped tiresize. Other types may damage your ve-hicle. Use chain tensioners when recom-mended by the tire chain manufacturer toensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tirechain must be secured or removed to pre-vent the possibility of whipping action dam-age to the fenders or underbody. If pos-sible, avoid fully loading your vehicle whenusing tire chains. In addition, drive at areduced speed. Otherwise, your vehiclemay be damaged and/or vehicle handlingand performance may be adversely af-fected.

Never install tire chains on a T-type sparetire. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

COLD WEATHER DRIVING


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

carried in the vehicle during winter:

O a scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

O a sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

O a shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-drifts.

O extra window washer fluid to refill the res-ervoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

O Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave a lot less traction or grip underthese conditions. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

O Whatever the condition, drive withcaution. Accelerate and slow downwith care. If accelerating or down-shifting too fast, the drive wheels will

lose even more traction.

O Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

O Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

O Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patchof ice is seen ahead, brake beforereaching it. Try not to brake whileactually on the ice, and avoid anysudden steering maneuvers.

O Do not use cruise control on slipperyroads.

O Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

An engine block heater to assist extreme coldtemperature starting is available through yourINFINITI retailer.

WARNING

Do not use your heater with an un-grounded electrical system or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. You can beinjured by an electrical shock if you usean ungrounded connection.


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

6 In case of emergency

Roadside assistance program................................... 6-2Flat tire ...................................................................... 6-2

Changing a flat tire ............................................... 6-2Jump starting............................................................. 6-7Push starting ............................................................. 6-9

If your vehicle overheats ......................................... 6-10Towing your vehicle ................................................ 6-11

Towing recommended by INFINITI .................... 6-11Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ........ 6-13

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Every new INFINITI comes with a 4 year,unlimited mileage Roadside Assistance plan.In the event of a roadside emergency,Roadside Assistance Service is available toyou. Please refer to your Warranty Booklet(U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside assistanceinformation booklet (Canada) for details. Boththe Warranty Booklet and RoadsideAssistance Calling Card in your Owner’sLiterature Portfolio provide the Toll-FreeNumber to call for assistance. RoadsideAssistance is provided 24 hours a day, 365days a year, for 4 years from the date sold togive emergency roadside help, in the event ofmechanical or nonmechanical trouble(s) suchas flat tires, out-of-gas, dead battery, lostkeys, mechanical breakdown, accident, etc.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructionsbelow.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road awayfrom traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply theparking brake. Shift the manual transmis-sion into R (Reverse) position (automatictransmission in P (Park) position).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

O Make sure that the parking brake issecurely applied and the manualtransmission is shifted into R (Re-

verse), or the automatic transmissioninto P (Park).

O Never change tires when the vehicleis on a slope, ice or slippery areas.This is hazardous.

O Never change tires if oncoming trafficis close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-fessional road assistance.

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCEPROGRAM

FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flattire to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it isjacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and could cause personalinjury.

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove jacking tools 1 and spare tire 2 fromthe storage area located inside the trunk asillustrated.

If spacers are equipped, remove them beforeremoving the spare tire.

MCE0001 SCE0382A

SCE0383A

In case of emergency 6-3

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated above so that top of thejack contacts the vehicle at the jack uppoint. Align the jack head between the twonotches in the front or the rear as shown.Also fit the groove of the jack head betweenthe notches as shown.

SCE0424A CE1089


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

The jack should be used on level firmground.

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tireclears the ground. To lift the vehicle, se-curely hold the jack lever and rod with bothhands as shown above. Remove the wheelnuts, and then remove the tire.

WARNING

O Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack.

O Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not usethe jack provided with your vehicleon other vehicles.The jack is designed only for liftingyour vehicle during a tire change.

O Use the correct jack up points; neveruse any other part of the vehicle forjack support.

O Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

O Never use blocks on or under thejack.

O Do not start or run engine while ve-hicle is on the jack, as it may causethe vehicle to move. This is especiallytrue for vehicles with limited slid dif-ferential carriers.

O Do not allow passengers to stay inthe vehicle while it is on the jack.

CE1092


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Installing the spare tire

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surfacebetween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten thewheel nuts finger tight.

(Coupe models)

When replacing a front tire, make sure thehole in the spare tire wheel is aligned withthe pin on the brake rotor.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly until they aretight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence as illustrated.

WARNING

O Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

O Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause thenuts to become loose.

As soon as possible tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N zm)

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure:

After vehicle has been parked for threehours or more or driven less than 1 mile(1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the tireplacard affixed to the inside of the rear leftdoor opening (Sedan), the driver side cen-ter pillar (Coupe).

WARNING

Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

SCE0039


Z 02.11.6/V35-D/V5.0 X

Stowing the damaged tire and tools

Securely store the spare tire and jackingequipment in the vehicle.

WARNING

O Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properlysecured after use. Such items canbecome dangerous projectiles in anaccident or sudden stop.

O The T-type spare tire and small size

spare tire are designed for emer-gency use. See “Wheels and tires” inthe “8. Do-it-yourself” section.

If needed Roadside Assistance is available.Please see your Warranty Information Bookletor Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & Road-side assistance information booklet (Canada).

To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must befollowed.

WARNING

O If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resultingin severe injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

O Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

O Do not allow battery fluid to comeinto contact with eyes, skin, cloth orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is acorrosive sulphuric acid solutionwhich can cause severe burns. If thefluid should come into contact withanything, immediately flush the con-tacted area with water.

O Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

SCE0384A SCE0425

JUMP STARTING


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

O The booster battery must be rated at12 volts. Use of an improperly ratedbattery can damage your vehicle.

O Whenever working on or near a bat-tery, always wear suitable eye protec-tors (for example, goggles or indus-trial safety spectacles) and removerings, metal bands, or any other jew-elry. Do not lean over the batterywhen jump starting.

O Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and causeserious injury.


WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damageto the charging system and cause per-sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries into close proximity to each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply parking brake. Move the shift lever tothe N (Neutral) position (On automatictransmission models, move the selectorlever to the P (Park) position). Switch off allunnecessary electrical systems (light,heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence asillustrated.

SCE0426


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

O Always connect positive (+) to posi-tive (+) and negative (−) to bodyground (for example, strut mountingbolt, etc. — not to the battery).

O Make sure that cables do not touchmoving parts in the engine compart-ment and that clamps do not contactany other metal.

5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and letit run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicleat about 2,000 rpm, and start your engine inthe normal manner.

CAUTION

Do not keep starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the enginedoes not start right away, turn the keyoff and wait 3 to 4 seconds before tryingagain.

7. After starting your engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the posi-tive cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.

CAUTION

O Automatic transmission models can-not be push started. Attempting to doso may cause transmission damage.

O Three way catalyst equipped modelsshould not be started by pushingsince the three way catalyst may bedamaged.

O Never try to start the vehicle by tow-ing it; when the engine starts, theforward surge could cause the ve-hicle to collide with the tow vehicle.


PUSH STARTING


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not continue to drive if your ve-hicle overheats. Doing so couldcause a vehicle fire.

O To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator cap whilethe engine is still hot. When the radia-tor cap is removed, pressurized hotwater will spurt out, possibly causingserious injury.

O Do not open the hood if steam iscoming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading), orif you feel a lack of engine power, detectabnormal noise, etc., take the following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift leverto the N (Neutral) position (automatic trans-mission to the P (Park) position).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner switch. Open allthe windows, move the heater or air condi-

tioner temperature control to maximum hotand fan control to high speed.

3. If engine overheating is caused by climbinga long hill on a hot day, run the engine at afast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until thetemperature gauge indication returns tonormal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. Wait until nosteam or coolant can be seen before pro-ceeding.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from theengine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

6. Visually check if the cooling fan is running.The radiator hoses and radiator should notleak water.

If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan doesnot run, stop the engine.

WARNING

O Be careful not to allow your hands,hair, jewelry or clothing to come intocontact with, or to get caught in thecooling fan, or drive belt.

O The engine cooling fan can start atany time when the coolant tempera-ture is high.

7. After the engine cools down, check thecoolant level in the reservoir tank with theengine running. Add coolant to the reservoirtank if necessary. Have your vehicle re-paired at the nearest INFINITI retailer.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.Please see your Warranty Information Bookletor Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & Road-side assistance information booklet (Canada).

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincialin Canada) and local regulations for towingmust be followed. Incorrect towing equipmentcould damage your vehicle. Towing instruc-tions are available from an authorized INFINITIretailer. Local service operators are generallyfamiliar with the applicable laws and proce-dures for towing. To assure proper towing andto prevent accidental damage to your vehicle,INFINITI recommends having a service opera-tor tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have theservice operator carefully read the followingprecautions.

WARNING

O Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

O Never get under your vehicle after ithas been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

O When towing, make sure that thetransmission, axles, steering system

and powertrain are in working condi-tion. If any unit is damaged, dolliesmust be used.

O Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.Please see your Warranty Information Bookletor Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & Road-side assistance information booklet (Canada).

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYINFINITIINFINITI recommends that your vehicle betowed with the driving (rear) wheels off theground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truckas illustrated.

SCE0386

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

O Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on the

ground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward) as this maycause serious and expensive damageto the transmission.If it is necessary to tow the vehiclewith the front wheels raised, alwaysuse towing dollies under the rearwheels.

O When towing rear wheel drive modelswith the front wheels on the groundor on towing dollies:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-tion, and secure the steering wheel ina straight ahead position with a ropeor similar device. Never secure thesteering wheel by turning the ignitionkey to the LOCK position. This maydamage the steering lock mecha-nism.

O If you have to tow manual transmis-sion models with the rear wheels onthe ground or four wheels on theground (if you do not use towingdollies):

O Always release the parking brake.

O Move the transmission shift leverto the N (Neutral) position.

O Observe the following restricted tow-ing speeds and distances for manualtransmission models only:

O Speed: Below 60 MPH (95 km/h)

O Distance: Less than 500 miles (800km)

If the speed or distance must necessarily begreater, remove the propeller shaft before tow-ing to prevent damage to the transmission.

SCE0387


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing astuck vehicle)

After removing the front license plate (or thebumper cover), securely install the towinghook j1 . (Located with jacking tools.)

Reinstall the license plate on the lower fittingpoint.

WARNING

O Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

O Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explodeand result in serious injury. Parts ofyour vehicle could also overheat andbe damaged.

CAUTION

O Tow chains or cables must be at-tached only to the main structuralmembers of the vehicle.

O Always pull the cable straight outfrom the front of the vehicle. Neverpull on the vehicle at an angle.

O Pulling devices should be routed sothey do not touch any part of thesuspension, steering, brake or cool-ing systems.

O Pulling devices such as ropes or can-vas straps are not recommended foruse in vehicle towing or recovery.

SCE0396A SCE0427


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ....................................................... 7-2Washing................................................................ 7-2Waxing.................................................................. 7-2Removing spots.................................................... 7-3Underbody ............................................................ 7-3Glass .................................................................... 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels......................................... 7-3Chrome parts........................................................ 7-3

Cleaning interior ........................................................ 7-3

Floor mats ............................................................ 7-4Seat belts ............................................................. 7-4

Corrosion protection.................................................. 7-5Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion............................................................... 7-5Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion............................................................... 7-5To protect your vehicle from corrosion ................ 7-5

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

In order to maintain the appearance of yourvehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

In the following cases, please wash your ve-hicle as soon as possible to protect the paintsurface.

O After a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain

O After driving on coastal roads

O When contaminants such as soot, birddroppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugsget on the paint surface

O When dust or mud builds up on the surface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHING

Thoroughly rinse surface dirt off the vehiclewith a wet sponge and plenty of clean water.Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soapsuch as Nissan Car Wash, or a general pur-pose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean,

lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

O Do not use strong household soap,strong chemical detergents, gasolineor solvents.

O Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight or while the vehicle body ishot, as the surface may becomewater-spotted.

O Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so that the paint surface isnot scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerableto the effects of road salt. Therefore, theseareas must be regularly cleaned. Make surethat the drain holes in the lower edge of thedoor are open. Spray water under the body

and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt andwash away road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surfaceby using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. Polish-ing is recommended to remove built-up waxresidue and to avoid a weathered appearancebefore re-applying wax.

If you wish to wax your vehicle, only use a waxspecified for use over clear coats, such asNissan Liquid or Spray Wax. Your INFINITIretailer can assist you in choosing the properproduct.

O Wax your vehicle only after a thoroughwashing. Follow the instructions suppliedwith the wax.

O Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

O If the surface does not polish easily, use aroad tar remover and wax again.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finishmay dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, in-sects, and tree sap as quickly as possible fromthe surface of the paint to avoid lasting dam-age or staining. Special cleaning products areavailable at your INFINITI retailer or any auto-motive accessory store.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, theunderbody must be cleaned regularly. This willprevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing underbody and suspension corrosion.Before the winter period and again in thespring, the underseal must be checked and, ifnecessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dustfilm from the glass surfaces. It is normal forglass to become coated with a film after thevehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleanerand a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the window,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive

cleaners or chlorine based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the elec-trical conductors, radio antenna ele-ments or rear window defogger ele-ments.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash regularly, especially during wintermonths in areas where road salt is used. Saltcould discolor the wheel if not removed.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the inte-rior trim, plastic parts and seats using avacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyland leather surfaces with a clean, soft clothdampened in mild soap solution, then wipeclean with a dry soft cloth. Before using anyfabric protector, read the manufacturer’s rec-ommendations. Some fabric protectors con-tain chemicals that may stain or bleach theseat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water, toclean the meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

O Never use gasoline, thinner, or anysimilar material.

O The leather seats should be regularlycoated with a leather wax like saddlesoap. Never use car wax.

O Never use fabric protectors unlessrecommended by the manufacturer.

O Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It maydamage the lens cover.

CLEANING INTERIOR

Appearance and care 7-3

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

FLOOR MATS

The use of Genuine INFINITI floor mats canextend the life of your vehicle carpet and makeit easier to clean the interior. No matter whatmats are used, be sure they are fitted foryour vehicle and are properly positioned inthe footwell to prevent interference withpedal operation. Mats should be maintainedwith regular cleaning and replaced if theybecome excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid(Driver side only)

This model includes a front floor mat bracket toact as a floor mat positioning aid. INFINITIfloor mats have been specially designed foryour vehicle model. The driver’s side floor mathas a grommet hole incorporated in it. Simplyposition the mat by placing the floor matbracket through the floor mat grommet holewhile centering the mat in the floorpan contour.

Periodically check to make certain that themats are properly positioned.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solu-tion. Allow the belts to dry completely beforeusing them.

WARNING

Do not allow wet belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, orchemical solvents since these may se-verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

SAI0012


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION:

O The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas.

O Damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION:

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on thevehicle body underside can accelerate corro-sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry com-pletely inside the vehicle, and should be re-moved for drying to avoid floor panelcorrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing andwhere atmospheric pollution exists and roadsalt is used.

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate the rateof corrosion to those parts which are not wellventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in theair in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use willaccelerate the corrosion process. Road saltwill also accelerate the disintegration of paintsurfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION:

O Wash and wax your vehicle often to keepthe vehicle clean.

O Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

O Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsopen to avoid water accumulation.

O Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CAUTION

O NEVER remove dirt, sand or otherdebris from the passenger compart-ment by washing it out with a hose.Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner orbroom.

O Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic com-ponents inside the vehicle as thismay damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corro-sion and deterioration of underbody compo-nents such as the exhaust system, fuel andbrake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fend-ers.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and cor-rosion, which may be required in some areas,consult your local INFINITI retailer.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions .......................................... 8-2Engine compartment check locations ....................... 8-4Engine cooling system .............................................. 8-5

Checking engine coolant level ............................. 8-5Changing engine coolant ..................................... 8-6

Engine oil .................................................................. 8-7Checking engine oil level ..................................... 8-7Changing engine oil and filter .............................. 8-8

Automatic transmission fluid ................................... 8-10Power steering fluid ................................................ 8-10Brake and clutch fluid ............................................. 8-11

Brake fluid .......................................................... 8-11Clutch fluid.......................................................... 8-11

Window washer fluid ............................................... 8-12Battery ..................................................................... 8-13

Jump starting...................................................... 8-14Drive belts ............................................................... 8-14Spark plugs ............................................................. 8-15

Replacing spark plugs........................................ 8-15Air cleaner ............................................................... 8-16Windshield wiper blades ......................................... 8-16

Cleaning ............................................................. 8-16Replacing............................................................ 8-17

Parking brake and brake pedal............................... 8-18Checking parking brake ..................................... 8-18Checking brake pedal ........................................ 8-18Brake booster ..................................................... 8-19

Fuses....................................................................... 8-20Engine compartment .......................................... 8-20Passenger compartment .................................... 8-21

Keyfob battery replacement .................................... 8-21Lights....................................................................... 8-23

Headlights........................................................... 8-25Exterior and interior lights .................................. 8-26

Wheels and tires ..................................................... 8-30Tire pressure ...................................................... 8-30Types of tires...................................................... 8-30Tire chains.......................................................... 8-31Changing wheels and tires................................. 8-32

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

When performing any inspection or mainte-nance work on your vehicle, always take careto prevent serious accidental injury to yourselfor damage to the vehicle. The following aregeneral precautions which should be closelyobserved.

WARNING

O Park the vehicle on a level surface,apply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the ve-hicle from moving. For a manualtransmission, move the shift lever toN (Neutral) position. For an automatictransmission, move the selector leverto P (Park) position.

O Be sure the ignition key is OFF orLOCK when performing any parts re-placement or repairs.

O If you must work with the enginerunning, keep your hands, clothing,hair and tools away from movingfans, belts and any other movingparts.

O It is advised to secure or remove any

loose clothing and any jewelry, suchas rings, watches, etc. before work-ing on your vehicle.

O Always wear eye protection when-ever you work on your vehicle.

O If you must run the engine in anenclosed space such as a garage, besure there is proper ventilation forexhaust gases to escape.

O Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle,support it with safety stands.

O Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from fuel and the bat-tery.

O On gasoline engine models with theMultiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System,the fuel filter or fuel lines should beserviced by an INFINITI retailer be-cause the fuel lines are under highpressure even when the engine is off.

CAUTION

O Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn off the engine andwait until it cools down.

O Never connect or disconnect eitherthe battery or any transistorized com-ponent connector while the ignitionkey is on.

O Never leave any engine or automatictransmission related component har-ness connector disconnected whilethe ignition key is on.

O Avoid direct contact with used engineoil and coolant. Improperly disposedengine oil, engine coolant and/orother vehicle fluids can hurt the envi-ronment. Always conform to localregulations for disposal of vehiclefluid.

This “8. Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc-tions regarding only those items which arerelatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is also

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

available. See “Owner’s Manual/ServiceManual order information” in the “10. Technicaland consumer information” section.

You should be aware that incomplete or im-proper servicing may result in operating diffi-culties or excessive emissions, and could af-fect your warranty coverage. If in doubt aboutany servicing, have it done by your INFINITIretailer.

Do-it-yourself 8-3

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Fuse/fusible link holder

2. Battery

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Clutch fluid reservoir

6. Power steering fluid reservoir

7. Engine coolant reservoir

8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

9. Radiator filler cap

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Air cleaner

SDI1485

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS

8-4 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

The engine cooling system is filled at thefactory with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solu-tion contains rust and corrosion inhibitors,therefore additional cooling system additivesare not necessary.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, besure to use only a genuine NISSAN anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with theproper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freezeand 50% demineralized water/distilledwater. The use of other types of coolantsolutions may damage your enginecooling system.

Outside temperaturedown to Anti-

freeze

Deminer-alizedwater/

distilledwater°C °F

−35 −30 50% 50%

WARNING

O Never remove the radiator cap whenthe engine is hot. Serious burnscould be caused by high pressurefluid escaping from the radiator. Waituntil the engine and radiator cooldown.

O See “If your vehicle overheats” in the“6. In case of emergency” section.

O The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure cap. To prevent engine damage,use only a genuine NISSAN radiatorcap.

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tankwhen the engine is cold. If the coolant level isbelow MIN, add coolant up to the MAX level. Ifthe reservoir tank is empty, check the coolantlevel in the radiator when the engine is cold.If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fillthe radiator with coolant up to the filler openingand also add it to the reservoir tank up to theMAX level.

If the engine cooling system frequentlyrequires coolant, have it checked by yourINFINITI retailer.

SDI1385

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Do-it-yourself 8-5

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

O Major cooling system repairs should beperformed by your INFINITI retailer. Theservice procedures can be found in theappropriate INFINITI Service Manual.

O Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

O To avoid being scalded, never changethe coolant when the engine is hot.

O Never remove the radiator cap whenthe engine is hot. Serious burnscould be caused by high pressurefluid escaping from the radiator.

O Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

O Keep coolant out of reach of childrenand pets.

1. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom ofradiator, and remove radiator filler cap.

O Be careful not to allow coolant to con-tact drive belts.

O Waste coolant must be disposed ofproperly. Check your local regulations.

2. Close the radiator drain plug securely afterthe coolant is drained.

3. Fill the radiator slowly with the proper mix-ture of anti-freeze solution and demineral-ized water/distilled water. Fill the reservoirtank up to the MAX level. Then install theradiator filler cap.

4. Start the engine and warm it up until itreaches normal operating temperature.Then race the engine 2 or 3 times under noload. Watch the engine coolant tempera-ture gauge for signs of overheating.

5. Stop the engine. After it completely coolsdown, refill the radiator up to the filleropening. Fill the reservoir tank up to theMAX level. Check the drain plug for anysign of leakage.

6. Recheck the coolant level after the vehiclehas been driven for a day.

SDI0114

8-6 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andapply parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operatingtemperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back into theoil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check theoil level. It should be between the H and Lmarks. If the oil level is below the L mark,remove the oil filler cap and pour recom-mended oil through the opening. Do notoverfill.

6. Recheck oil level with dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.Operating with insufficient amount of oilcan damage the engine, and such dam-age is not covered by warranty.

SDI1386 SDI1402

ENGINE OIL

Do-it-yourself 8-7

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHANGING ENGINE OIL ANDFILTER

Change the engine oil and filter according tothe maintenance intervals shown in the “9.Maintenance” section.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andapply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operatingtemperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using a suit-able floor jack and safety jack stands.

O Place the safety jack stands under thevehicle jack-up points.

O A suitable adapter should be attached tothe jack stand saddle.

5. Remove the plastic engine undercover.

a. Remove the small plastic clip at the centerpoint of the undercover.

b. Then remove the other bolts that hold theundercover in place.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and supportpoints are used to avoid vehicle dam-age.

Engine oil and filter

1. Place a large drain pan under the drainplug.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and

completely drain the oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as theengine oil is hot.

O Waste oil must be disposed of properly.

SDI1520

8-8 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Check your local regulations.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surfacewith a clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old rubber gasketremaining on the mounting surface ofthe engine.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slightresistance is felt, then tighten additionallymore than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:11 to 15 ft-lb(14.7 to 20.5 N zm)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with anew washer. Securely tighten the drain plugwith a wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 to 29 ft-lb(29 to 39 N zm)

Do not use excessive force.9. Refill engine with recommended oil and

install the cap securely.

CAUTION

The dipstick must be inserted in place toprevent oil spillage from the dipstickhole while filling the engine with oil.

See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-sumer information” section for drain andrefill capacity. The drain and refill capacitydepends on the oil temperature and draintime. Use these specifications for referenceonly. Always use the dipstick to determinethe proper amount of oil in the engine.

CAUTION

When filling oil, do not pull out thedipstick.

10.Start the engine and check for leakagearound the drain plug and the oil filter.Correct as required.

11.Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with the dip-stick. Add engine oil if necessary.

After the operation

1. Install the engine undercover into positionas the following steps.

a. Pull the center of the small plastic clip out.

b. Hold the engine undercover into position.

c. Insert the clip through the undercover intothe hole in the frame, then push the centerof the clip in to lock the clip in place.

d. Install the other bolts that hold the under-cover in place. Be careful not to strip thebolts or over-tighten them.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.

3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

WARNING

O Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin can-cer.

O Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

Do-it-yourself 8-9

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

If checking or replacement is required, werecommend your INFINITI retailer for servic-ing.

CAUTION

O Use only Genuine Nissan ATF MaticFluid J. Do not mix with other fluids.

O Using automatic transmission fluidother than Genuine Nissan ATF MaticFluid J will cause deterioration indriveability and automatic transmis-sion durability, and may damage theautomatic transmission, which is notcovered by the INFINITI new vehiclelimited warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid isalso described on caution labels located in theengine compartment.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank.

The fluid level should be checked using theHOT range at fluid temperatures of 122 to176°F (50 to 80°C) or using the COLD range atfluid temperatures of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C).

CAUTION

O Do not overfill.

O Use Genuine Nissan PSF II or equiva-lent.

SDI1408

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONFLUID

POWER STEERING FLUID

8-10 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

BRAKE FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluidis below the MIN line or the brake warning lightcomes on, add DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line.If fluid must be added frequently, the systemshould be thoroughly checked by yourINFINITI retailer.

WARNING

Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or con-taminated fluid may damage the brake

system. Do not add synthetic brakefluid. The use of improper fluids candamage the brake system and affect thevehicle’s stopping ability.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluidis spilled, wash with water.

CLUTCH FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluidlevel is below the MIN. line, add GenuineNissan Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluidup to the MAX. line.

If fluid is added frequently, the system shouldbe thoroughly checked by your INFINITI re-tailer.

SDI0847 SDI1478

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

Do-it-yourself 8-11

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluidmay damage the clutch system.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluidis spilled, wash the surface with water.

Add fluid when the low washer fluid warninglight comes on. Add a washer solvent to thewater for better cleaning. In the winter season,add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Followthe manufacturer’s instructions for the mixtureratio.

WARNING

Anti-freeze is poisonous and should bestored carefully in marked containersout of the reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution.This may result in damage to the paint.SDI1388

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

8-12 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Anycorrosion should be washed off with asolution of baking soda and water.

O Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

O If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the (—) negative batteryterminal cable to prevent discharging it.

Coupe

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed fromthe battery terminal, do not close eitherof front doors. The automatic windowadjusting function will not work, and theside roof panel may be damaged.

To disconnect the negative (−) battery ter-minal, perform the procedure in the follow-ing order. Otherwise, the window and theside roof panel may contact and be dam-aged.

1. Close the windows.

2. Open the hood.

3. Close and lock all the doors.

4. Disconnect the negative (−) battery ter-minal.

5. Securely close the hood.

To connect the negative (−) battery termi-nal, perform the procedure in the followingorder. Otherwise, the window and the sideroof panel may contact and be damaged.

1. Unlock and open the driver side door.Do not close the door.

2. Open the hood.

3. Connect the negative (−) battery termi-nal. Then close the hood.

4. Fully open the driver side door window.

5. Close the driver side door and the win-dow.

Sedan and coupe

WARNING

O Do not expose the battery to flamesor electrical sparks. Hydrogen gasgenerated by battery action is explo-sive. Do not allow battery fluid tocontact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or

painted surfaces. After touching abattery or battery cap, do not touch orrub your eyes. Thoroughly wash yourhands. If you get acid on your eyes,skin or clothing, immediately flushwith water for at least 15 minutes andseek medical attention.

O Do not operate the vehicle if the bat-tery fluid is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

O When working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectionand remove all jewelry.

O Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds. Wash hands after han-dling.

O Keep the battery out of the reach ofchildren.

BATTERY

Do-it-yourself 8-13

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should bebetween the MAX and MIN lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level to the indicator in eachfiller opening. Do not overfill.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures orunder severe conditions require frequentchecks of the battery fluid level.

1. Remove the cell plugs.

2. Add distilled water up to the MAX level.

3. Tighten cell plugs.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump start-ing” in the “6. In case of emergency” section. Ifthe engine does not start by jump starting, thebattery may have to be replaced. Contact yourINFINITI retailer.

1. Power steering fluid pump

2. Fan

3. Alternator

4. Crankshaft pulley

5. Air conditioner compressor

.: Tension checking points

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position. The engine could rotate

DI0137M SDI1480 SDI1389

DRIVE BELTS

8-14 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of un-usual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhesion orlooseness. If the belt is in poor condition orloose, have it replaced or adjusted by yourINFINITI retailer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi-tion and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule in this manual.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switchare off and that the parking brake isengaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket toremove the spark plugs. An incorrectsocket can damage the spark plugs.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

If replacement is required, see your INFINITIretailer for servicing.

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the platinum-tipped spark plugs as frequently as the con-ventional type spark plugs since they will lastmuch longer. Follow the maintenance sched-ule but, do not reuse them by cleaning orregapping.

Always replace with recommendedplatinum-tipped spark plugs.

SDI0145

SPARK PLUGS

Do-it-yourself 8-15

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

If maintenance is required, see your INFINITIretailer for servicing.

The filter element should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the mainte-nance intervals. See “Periodic maintenanceschedules” in the “9. Maintenance” section formaintenance intervals. When replacing thefilter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housingand the cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING

O Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you orothers to be burned. The air cleanernot only cleans the air, it stops flameif the engine backfires. If it is notthere, and the engine backfires, youcould be burned. Do not drive withthe air cleaner removed and be care-ful when working on the engine withthe air cleaner removed.

O Never pour fuel into the throttle bodyor attempt to start the engine with theair cleaner removed. Doing so couldresult in serious injury.

CAUTION

O After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position.

Otherwise it may be damaged whenthe engine hood is opened.

O Make sure the wiper blade contactsthe glass, otherwise the arm may bedamaged from wind pressure.

O Worn windshield wiper blades candamage the windshield and impairdriver vision.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with awasher solution or a mild detergent. Yourwindshield is clean if beads do not form whenrinsing with clear water.

Clean the blade by wiping it with a clothsoaked in a washer solution or a mild deter-

gent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. Ifyour windshield is still not clear after cleaningthe blades and using the wiper, replace theblades.

AIR CLEANER WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-16 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Pull the wiper arm.

2. Push the lock pin, then remove the wiperblade.

3. Insert the new wiper blade to the wiper armuntil a click sounds.

If necessary, clean the windshield washernozzle with a needle or small pin.

DI1018M

SDI1390

Do-it-yourself 8-17

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHECKING PARKING BRAKE

Pedal type

From the released position, depress the park-ing brake pedal slowly and firmly, and checkthe distance between the initial and final posi-tion of the pedal. If it is out of the range shownabove, see your INFINITI retailer.

Lever type

From the released position, pull the parkingbrake lever up slowly and firmly. If the numberof clicks is out of the range listed above, seeyour INFINITI retailer.

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distancebetween the upper surface of the pedal andthe metal floor. If it is out of the range shownabove, see your INFINITI retailer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time thebrake pedal is applied.

SDI1391 SDI1447 DI1020MK

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKEPEDAL

8-18 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

See your INFINITI retailer and have itchecked if the brake pedal height doesnot return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle haveaudible wear indicators. When a brake padrequires replacement, it will make a highpitched scraping or screeching sound whenthe vehicle is in motion whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indi-cator sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, oc-casional brake squeak, squeal or other noisemay be heard. Occasional brake noise duringlight to moderate stops is normal and does notaffect the function or performance of the brakesystem.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For additional information, see“Periodic maintenance schedules” in the “9.Maintenance” section for maintenance inter-vals.

High performance sports brake pad occasion-ally makes squeak, squeal or other brakingnoise because of its very high friction coeffi-cient.

These occasional brake noise is normal, but ifit continues, see your INFINITI retailer.

BRAKE BOOSTER

Check the brake booster function as follows:

1. With the engine off, press and release thebrake pedal several times. When brakepedal movement (distance of travel) re-mains the same from one pedal applicationto the next, continue on to the next step.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, start theengine. The pedal height should drop alittle.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop theengine. Keeping the pedal depressed forabout 30 seconds, the pedal height shouldnot change.

4. Run the engine for one minute withoutdepressing the brake pedal, then turn it off.Depress the brake pedal several times. Thepedal travel distance will decrease gradu-ally with each depression as the vacuum isreleased from the booster.

If the brakes do not operate properly, see yourINFINITI retailer.

Do-it-yourself 8-19

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of higher amperagerating than that specified on the fusebox cover. This could damage the elec-trical system or cause a fire.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition key and headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood and remove thecover on the battery and the fuse/fusiblelink holder.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a newfuse.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by yourINFINITI retailer.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not operateand fuses are in good condition, check thefusible links. If any of these fusible links aremelted, replace only with genuine NISSANparts.

SDI1392

FUSES

8-20 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the fuse box lid.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a newfuse.

5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by yourINFINITI retailer.

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid using a suitable tool.

2. Replace the battery with a new one.Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-lent

SDI1393

SPA1374

KEYFOB BATTERYREPLACEMENT

Do-it-yourself 8-21

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Make sure that the ! side faces thebottom case.

3. Close the lid securely.

4. Push the keyfob button two or three timesto check its operation.

See your INFINITI retailer if you need anyassistance for replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 4above.

O Be careful not to touch the circuit boardand the battery terminal.

O An improperly disposed battery canharm the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

O The keyfob is water-resistant; however,if it gets wet, immediately wipe it com-pletely dry.

O When changing batteries, do not let dustor oil get on the keyfob.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the manufacturer compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment. This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: (1) This de-vice may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation of thedevice.

8-22 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Sedan

1. Front turn signal light

2. Front fog light/Headlight (high-beam) andclearance light

3. Headlight (low-beam)

4. Map light

5. Rear personal light

6. Front side marker light

7. Step light

8. Trunk light

9. High-mounted stop light (if so equipped)

10. License plate light

11. Back-up light

12. Rear combination light(Turn signal, Stop/Tail, Side marker)

SDI1509

LIGHTS

Do-it-yourself 8-23

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Coupe

1. Front turn signal light, clearance light

2. Front fog light/Headlight (high-beam)

3. Headlight (low-beam)

4. Clearance light

5. Map light

6. Front side marker light

7. Step light

8. High-mounted stop light (if so equipped)

9. Trunk light

10. License plate light

11. Rear combination light(Turn signal, Stop/Tail, Back-up, Sidemarker)

SDI1486

8-24 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing

If replacement is required, see an authorizedINFINITI retailer.

Xenon headlight bulb:

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, theyproduce a high voltage. To prevent anelectric shock, never attempt to modifyor disassemble the headlight assembly.Always have your xenon headlights re-placed at an authorized INFINITI retailer.For additional information, see “Head-light and turn signal switch” in the “2.Instruments and controls” section.

Halogen headlight bulb:

A bulb can be replaced from under the enginecompartment without removing the headlightassembly.

CAUTION

O High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulbmay break if the glass envelope isscratched or the bulb is dropped.

O When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

O Do not touch the bulb.

O Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed:Bulb no. H1 (55W) - Low-beam

HB2 (60/55W) - High-beam/Fog light

O Do not leave the bulb out of the head-light reflector for a long period of timeas dust, moisture, and smoke mayenter the headlight body and affectthe performance of the headlight.

Do-it-yourself 8-25

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Front turn signal* 21 T20

Clearance light* 5 T10

Front side marker light 3.8 T10

Rear combination light

Turn signal 21 T20

Stop/Tail* (LED) —

Side marker light* (LED) —

Back-up light 18 T16

License plate light 5 T10

High-mounted stop light* (LED) —

Map light 8 —

Rear personal light (Sedan) 8 —

Step light 5 —

Trunk light 3.4 158

Vanity mirror light (if so equipped) 1.32 —

*: See an authorized INFINITI retailer for replacement.

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.When replacing a bulb, first remove the lensand/or cover.

MDI0006

8-26 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

SDI1395 SDI1396A

Do-it-yourself 8-27

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

SDI1510 SDI1398A

8-28 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

SDI1399A

SDI1400

SDI1258

SDI1407

SDI1401

Do-it-yourself 8-29

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the“6. In case of emergency” section.

TIRE PRESSUREMaximum inflation pressureDo not exceed the maximum inflation pres-sures shown on the side wall of the tire.

Tire inflation pressureCheck the tire pressure (including spare) atleast once a month and always prior to longdistance trips. Incorrect tire pressure may ad-versely affect tire life and vehicle handling. Tirepressure should be checked when tires areCOLD. Tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours,or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderatespeeds. COLD tire pressures are shown onthe tire placard affixed to the inside of the rearleft door opening (Sedan), the driver sidecenter pillar (Coupe).

WARNING

O Improperly inflated tires can fail sud-denly and cause an accident.

O The vehicle capacity weight is indi-cated on the tire placard. Do not loadyour vehicle beyond this capacity.Overloading your vehicle may resultin reduced tire life, unsafe operatingconditions due to premature tire fail-ure, or unfavorable handling charac-teristics and could also lead to aserious accident. Loading beyond thespecified capacity may also result infailure of other vehicle components.

O Before taking a long trip, or wheneveryou have loaded your vehicle heavily,use a tire pressure gauge to ensurethat the tire pressure is at the speci-

fied level.

O Do not drive your vehicle over 85MPH (140 km/h) unless it is equippedwith high speed capability tires. Driv-ing faster than 85 MPH (140 km/h)may result in tire failure, loss of con-trol and possible injury.

O For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety In-formation” (Canada) in the INFINITIWarranty Information Booklet.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., summer, all season or snow) andconstruction. Your INFINITI retailer maybe able to help you with informationabout tire type, size, speed rating andavailability. Replacement tires may havea lower speed rating than the factory

DI1033M

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-30 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

equipped tires, and may not match thepotential maximum vehicle speed. Neverexceed the maximum speed rating of thetire.

For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the INFINITI WarrantyInformation Booklet.

All season tires

INFINITI specifies all season tires on somemodels to provide good performance for useall year around, including snowy and icy roadconditions. All season tires are identified byALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.Snow tires have better snow traction than allseason tires and may be more appropriate insome areas.

Summer tires

INFINITI specifies summer tires on some mod-els to provide superior performance on dryroads. Summer tire performance in snow andice will be substantially reduced. Summer tiresdo not have the tire traction rating M&S on thetire sidewall.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, INFINITI recommends the use ofsnow or all season tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary toselect tires equivalent in size and load rating tothe original equipment tires. If you do not, itcan adversely affect the safety and handling ofyour vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lower speedratings than factory equipped tires and maynot match the potential maximum vehiclespeed. Never exceed the maximum speedrating of the tire.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, INFINITI recommends the use ofsnow or all season tires on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some provincesand states prohibit their use. Check local, stateand provincial laws before installing studdedtires. Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINSUse of tire chains may be prohibited accordingto location. Check the local laws before install-ing tire chains. When installing tire chains,make sure they are of proper size for the tireson your vehicle and are installed according tothe chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Useonly SAE class S chains. Class “S” chainsare used on vehicles with restricted tire tovehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class“S” chains are designed to meet the SAEstandard minimum clearances between thetire and the closest vehicle suspension or bodycomponent required to accommodate the useof a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are deter-mined using the factory equipped tire size.Other types may damage your vehicle. Usechain tensioners when recommended by thetire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit.Loose end links of the tire chain must besecured or removed to prevent the possibilityof whipping action damage to the fenders orundercarriage. If possible, avoid fully loadingyour vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, yourvehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle han-dling and performance may be adversely af-fected.

Never install tire chains on a T-type sparetire. Do not use the chains on dry roads.

Do-it-yourself 8-31

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation (Sedan)

INFINITI recommends that tires be rotatedevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Wheel nut tightening torque:80 ft-lb (108 N zm)

See “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emergency”section for tire replacing procedures.

Tire rotation (Coupe)

Tires cannot be rotated in this vehicle, as fronttires are different size from rear tires and thedirection of wheel rotation is fixed in each tire.

A pin is on the front brake rotor to prevent therear wheels from being installed in place of thefront wheels. The spare tire can be installed inplace of the front and rear wheels. Wheninstalling the spare tire in the front wheel, thehole in the spare tire wheel must be alignedwith the pin on the brake rotor.

WARNING

O After rotating the tires, adjust the tirepressure.

O Retighten the wheel nuts when thevehicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

O Do not include the T-type spare tire orany other small size spare tire in thetire rotation.

O For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety-Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-formation” (Canada) in the INFINITIWarranty Information Booklet.

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

O Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulging,or objects caught in the tread. If ex-cessive wear, cracks, bulging, ordeep cuts are found, the tire shouldbe replaced.

O The original tires have a built-in treadwear indicator. When the wear indica-

DI0048-C MDI0004

8-32 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.11.1/V35-D/V5.0 X

tor is visible, the tire should be re-placed.

O Improper service for a spare tire mayresult in serious personal injury. If itis necessary to repair the spare tire,contact your INFINITI retailer.


Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size,speed rating and load carrying capacity asoriginally equipped. See “Specifications” in the“10. Technical and consumer information” sec-tion for recommended types and sizes of tiresand wheels.

WARNING

O The use of tires other than thoserecommended or the mixed use of

tires of different brands, construction(bias, bias-belted or radial), or treadpatterns can adversely affect the ride,braking, handling, ground clearance,body-to-tire clearance, tire chainclearance, speedometer calibration,headlight aim and bumper height.Some of these effects may lead toaccidents and could result in seriouspersonal injury.

O If the wheels are changed for anyreason, always replace with wheelswhich have the same offset dimen-sion. Wheels of a different offsetcould cause early tire wear, possiblydegraded vehicle handling character-istics and/or interference with thebrake discs. Such interference canlead to decreased braking efficiencyand/or early brake pad wear.

O Do not install a deformed wheel ortire even if it has been repaired. Suchwheels or tires could have structuraldamage and could fail withoutwarning.

O The use of retread tires is not recom-mended.


Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle han-dling and tire life. Even with regular use,wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, theyshould be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be performedwith the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancingthe rear wheels on the vehicle could lead totransmission damage.

For additional information regarding tires, referto “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in theINFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

O Wash the wheels when washing the vehicleto maintain their appearance.

O Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

Do-it-yourself 8-33

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

wheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

O Do not use abrasive cleaners when wash-ing the wheels.

O Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

O INFINITI recommends that the road wheelsbe waxed to protect against road salt inareas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (T-type spare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the T-typespare tire must be used, otherwise your ve-hicle could be damaged or involved in anaccident.

CAUTION

O The T-type spare tire should be usedonly for emergency. It should be re-placed by the standard tire at the firstopportunity.

O Drive carefully while the T-type sparetire is installed.

Avoid sharp turns and abrupt brakingwhile driving.

O Periodically check the T-type sparetire inflation pressure, and alwayskeep it at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

O Always keep the pressure of the fullsize spare tire (if so equipped) at therecommended pressure for standardtires, as indicated on the tire placard.For tire placard location, see “Tireplacard” in the “10. Technical andconsumer information”.

O Do not drive your vehicle at speedsfaster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

O Do not use tire chains on a T-typespare tire. Tire chains will not fit prop-erly on the T-type spare tire and maycause damage to the vehicle.

O When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the T-type spare tireshould be used on the front wheeland the original tire used on the rearwheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains

only on the rear two original tires.(Sedan)

O Tire tread of the T-type spare tire willwear at a faster rate than the originaltire. Replace the T-type spare tire assoon as the tread wear indicatorsappear.

O Because the T-type spare tire issmaller than the original tire, groundclearance is reduced. To avoid dam-age to the vehicle do not drive overobstacles. Also do not drive the ve-hicle through an automatic car washsince it may get caught.

O Do not use the T-type spare tire onother vehicles.

O Do not use more than one T-typespare tire at the same time.

O Do not tow a trailer while the T-typespare tire is installed.

8-34 Do-it-yourself

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

9 Maintenance

General maintenance................................................ 9-2Explanation of maintenance items ....................... 9-3

Periodic maintenance schedules .............................. 9-5

Schedule 1 ........................................................... 9-5Schedule 2 ........................................................... 9-5Explanation of maintenance items ..................... 9-10

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Your new INFINITI has been designed to haveminimum maintenance requirements withlonger service intervals to save you both timeand money. However, some day-to-day andregular maintenance is essential to maintainyour INFINITI’s good mechanical condition, aswell as its emission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make surethat the specified maintenance, as well asgeneral maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only onewho can ensure that your vehicle receives theproper maintenance care. You are a vital linkin the maintenance chain.

General maintenance:

General maintenance includes those itemswhich should be checked during normalday-to-day operation of the vehicle. They areessential if your vehicle is to continue tooperate properly. It is your responsibility toperform these procedures regularly asprescribed.

These checks or inspections can be done byyourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer,your INFINITI retailer.

Periodic maintenance:

The maintenance items listed in this part are

required to be serviced at regular intervals.

However, under severe driving conditions, ad-ditional or more frequent maintenance will berequired.

Where to go for service:

If maintenance service is required or yourvehicle appears to malfunction, have the sys-tems checked and serviced by an authorizedINFINITI retailer.

INFINITI technicians are well-trained special-ists and are kept up to date with the latestservice information through technical bulletins,service tips, and in-dealership information sys-tems. They are completely qualified to work onINFINITI vehicles before work begins.

You can be confident that your INFINITIretailer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenancerequirements on your vehicle — in a reliableand economic way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section.If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmell, be sure to check for the cause or haveyour INFINITI retailer do it promptly. In addi-tion, you should notify your INFINITI retailer ifyou think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, see “Maintenance precautions” in the “8.Do-it-yourself” section.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCEITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “*” is found in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge atleast once a month and always prior to longdistance trips. If necessary, adjust the pres-sure in all tires, including the spare, to thespecified pressure. Check carefully for dam-age, cuts or excessive wear.

Wheel nuts*: When checking the tires, makesure no nuts are missing, and check for anyloose nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km) (Sedan).

Tires cannot be rotated (Coupe).

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehiclepulls to either side while driving on a straightand level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, there may be a need forwheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normalhighway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

For additional information regarding tires, referto “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in theINFINITI Warranty Information booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regu-lar basis. Check the windshield at least everysix months for cracks or other damage. Have adamaged windshield repaired by a qualifiedrepair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracksor wear if they do not wipe properly.

Doors and engine hood: Check that all doorsand the engine hood, operate properly. Alsoensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricatehinges and latches if necessary. Make surethat the secondary latch keeps the hood fromopening when the primary latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication fre-quently.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when

performing periodic maintenance, cleaning thevehicle, etc.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regularbasis. Make sure that the headlights, stoplights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and otherlights are all operating properly and installedsecurely. Also check headlight aim.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure thatall warning lights and chimes are operatingproperly.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly andthat the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster: Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly andin sufficient quantity when operating the heateror air conditioner.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in thesteering conditions, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises.

Seats: Check seat position controls such asseat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to en-sure they operate smoothly and that all latcheslock securely in every position. Check that thehead restraints move up and down smoothlyand that the locks (if so equipped) hold se-curely in all latched positions.

Maintenance 9-3

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (For example, buckles, anchors, ad-justers and retractors) operate properly andsmoothly, and are installed securely. Checkthe belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear ordamage.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal forsmooth operation and make sure the pedaldoes not catch or require uneven effort. Keepthe floor mat away from the pedal.

Clutch pedal*: Make sure the pedal operatessmoothly and check that it has the proper freeplay.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Brake pedal*: Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure it has the properdistance under it when depressed fully. Checkthe brake booster function. Be sure to keep thefloor mat away from the pedal.

Parking brake*: Check that the lever has theproper travel and confirm that your vehicle isheld securely on a fairly steep hill with only theparking brake applied.

Automatic transmission P (Park) mecha-nism: On a fairly steep hill check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selector lever

in the P (Park) position without applying anybrakes.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (For example, each timeyou check the engine oil or refuel).

Windshield washer fluid*: Check that thereis adequate fluid in the tank.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolantlevel when the engine is cold.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,etc., that may have accumulated. Make surethe hoses have no cracks, deformation, dete-rioration or loose connections.

Brake and clutch fluid level*: Make sure thatthe brake and clutch fluid level is between theMAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.It should be between the MAX and MIN lines.Vehicles operated in high temperatures orunder severe conditions require frequentchecks of the battery fluid level.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt isfrayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after park-

ing the vehicle on a level spot and turning offthe engine. (Wait at least 10 minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.)

Power steering fluid level* and lines: Checkthe level when the fluid is cold and the engineis turned off. Check the lines for proper attach-ment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are noloose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound ofthe exhaust seems unusual or there is a smellof exhaust fumes, immediately locate thetrouble and correct it. See “Precautions whenstarting and driving” in the “5. Starting anddriving” section for exhaust gas (Carbon mon-oxide).

Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances, other-wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuellines and around the exhaust system. At theend of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, being carefulto clean those areas where mud and dirt mayaccumulate. For additional information, see“Cleaning exterior” in the “7. Appearance andcare” section.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle

9-4 Maintenance

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

has been parked for a while. Water drippingfrom the air conditioner after use is normal. Ifyou should notice any leaks or if gasolinefumes are evident, check for the cause andhave it corrected immediately.

To ensure smooth, trouble-free, safe and eco-nomical driving, INFINITI provides two differ-ent maintenance schedules that may be used,depending upon the conditions in which youusually drive. These schedules contain bothdistance and time intervals, up to 60,000 miles(96,000 km)/48 months. For most people, theodometer reading will indicate when service isneeded. However, if you drive very little, yourvehicle should be serviced at the regular timeintervals shown in the schedule. After 60,000miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continueperiodic maintenance at the samemileage/time intervals.

SCHEDULE 1

Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 ifyour driving habits frequently include one ormore of the following driving conditions:

O repeated short trips of less than 5 miles(8 km).

O repeated short trips of less than 10 miles(16 km) with outside temperatures re-maining below freezing.

O operating in hot weather in stop-and-gorush hour traffic.

O extensive idling and/or low speed driv-ing for long distances, such as police,taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

O driving in dusty conditions.

O driving on rough, muddy, or salt spreadroads.

O towing a trailer, using a camper or acar-top carrier.

SCHEDULE 2

Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 ifnone of the driving conditions shown in Sched-ule 1 apply to your driving habits.

PERIODIC MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

Maintenance 9-5

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Schedule 1Abbreviations: R = Replace, I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. [ ]: Perform service at the mileage intervals only

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

Perform at number of miles, kilometers ormonths, whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60

(km x 1,000) (6) (12) (18) (24) (30) (36) (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) (72) (78) (84) (90) (96)

Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R

Engine oil filter (Use Part No. 15208 31U00 or 15208 65F00 orequivalent) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (1) [R] [R]

EVAP vapor lines I* I*

Fuel lines I* I*

Drive belts See NOTE (2) I*

Engine coolant See NOTE (3) R*

Spark plugs (PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km)

Fuel filter See NOTE (4)

Intake & exhaust valve clearance* See NOTE (5)

NOTE: (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.(2) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged.(3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.(4) Maintenance-free item (In-tank type fuel filter).(5) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order

to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-6 Maintenance

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Schedule 1Abbreviations: R = Replace, I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.


Perform at number of miles, kilometers ormonths, whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60

(km x 1,000) (6) (12) (18) (24) (30) (36) (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) (72) (78) (84) (90) (96)

Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE

Brake lines & cables I I I I

Brake pads & rotors I I I I I I I I

Manual transmission gear oil or automatic trans-mission fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (1) I I I I

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts I I I I I I I I

Tire rotation See NOTE (2)

Exhaust system I I I I I I I I

In-cabin microfilter R R R R

NOTE: (1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)or 24 months. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan ATF Matic Fluid J will cause deterioration in driveability and automatictransmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.

(2) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “General maintenance” heading earlier in this section.

Maintenance 9-7

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Schedule 2Abbreviations: R = Replace, I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. [ ]: Perform service at the mileage intervals only


Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60

(km x 1,000) (12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96)

Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Engine oil R R R R R R R R

Engine oil filter (Use Part No. 15208 31U00 or 15208 65F00 or equivalent) R R R R R R R R

Air cleaner filter [R] [R]

EVAP vapor lines I* I*

Fuel lines I* I*

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I*

Engine coolant See NOTE (2) R*

Spark plugs (PLATINUM-TIPPED Type) Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km)

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Intake & exhaust valve clearance* See NOTE (4)

NOTE: (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged.(2) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.(3) Maintenance-free item (In-tank type fuel filter).(4) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order

to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-8 Maintenance

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Schedule 2Abbreviations: R = Replace, I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.


Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60

(km x 1,000) (12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96)

Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE

Brake lines & cables I I I I

Brake pads & rotors I I I I

Manual transmission gear oil or automatic transmission fluid &differential gear oil

See NOTE (1) I I I I

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts I I

Tire rotation See NOTE (2)

Exhaust system I I

In-cabin microfilter R R R R

NOTE: (1) Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan ATF Matic Fluid J will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic tran smissiondurability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.

(2) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “General maintenance” heading earlier in this section.

Maintenance 9-9

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCEITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “*” is found in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section.

Emission control systemmaintenance

Drive belts*: Check drive belts for wear, fray-ing or cracking and also for proper tension.Replace the drive belts if found damaged.

Air cleaner filter: Under normal driving con-ditions, the air cleaner filter should be replacedin accordance with the maintenance schedule.However, driving the vehicle in dusty areasmay cause more rapid clogging of the element.Consequently, the element may have to bereplaced more frequently.

EVAP vapor lines: Check vapor lines andconnections for failure or looseness. If leaksare found, replace them.

Fuel lines: Check the fuel hoses, piping andconnections for leaks, looseness or deteriora-tion. Replace any parts if they are damaged.

Engine coolant*: Drain and flush the coolingsystem.

Engine oil & oil filter*: Under normal driving

conditions, the engine oil and oil filter shouldbe replaced in accordance with the mainte-nance schedule. However, under severe driv-ing conditions, they may have to be replacedmore frequently.

Spark plugs*: Replace with new plugs havingthe correct heat range.

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables: Check the brake linesand hoses (including brake booster vacuumhoses, connections & check valve) and park-ing brake cables for proper attachment, leaks,cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterioration, etc.

Brake pads & rotors: Check these and theother neighboring brake components for wear,deterioration and leaks. Under severe drivingconditions, they may have to be inspectedmore frequently.

Automatic transmission fluid*: Using auto-matic transmission fluid other than GenuineNissan ATF Matic Fluid J will cause deteriora-tion in driveability and automatic transmissiondurability, and may damage the automatictransmission, which is not covered by theINFINITI new vehicle limited warranty. Ifchecking or replacement is required, we rec-ommend your INFINITI retailer for servicing.

Under severe driving conditions, the fluid

should be replaced at the specified interval.

Manual transmission oil & differential gearoil*: Check the oil level and visually inspect forsigns of leakage.

Under severe driving conditions, the oil shouldbe replaced at the specified interval.

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspensionparts: Check for damage, looseness and leak-age of oil or grease. Under severe drivingconditions, more frequent inspection should beperformed.

Exhaust system: Visually check the exhaustpipes, muffler, and hangers for proper attach-ment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, dete-rioration, etc. Under severe driving conditions,inspection should be performed more fre-quently.

In-cabin microfilter: Under normal condi-tions, this microfilter should be replaced inaccordance with the maintenance schedule.However, in some situations, the microfiltermay clog more rapidly (depending on the airconditioner’s working environment). If this hap-pens, the air flow may decrease, or the win-dows may fog up easily when the air condi-tioner is in use, the microfilter should bereplaced immediately at your INFINITI retailer.

9-10 Maintenance

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

10 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants/fluids ........................................................................ 10-2

Fuel recommendation......................................... 10-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendation............ 10-5Recommended SAE viscosity number............... 10-6Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricantrecommendations ............................................... 10-6

Specifications .......................................................... 10-7Engine ................................................................ 10-7Wheels and tires ................................................ 10-8Dimensions and weights .................................... 10-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country ....................................................... 10-9Vehicle identification ............................................... 10-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate........... 10-9Vehicle identification number(Chassis number) ............................................... 10-9Engine serial number ....................................... 10-10F.M.V.S.S. certification label ............................ 10-10Emission control information label ................... 10-11Tire placard ...................................................... 10-11Air conditioner specification label..................... 10-12

Installing front bumper cover................................. 10-12Installing front license plate................................... 10-13

Vehicle loading information................................... 10-14Terms ............................................................... 10-14Determining vehicle load capacity.................... 10-14Loading tips ...................................................... 10-15

Towing a trailer ..................................................... 10-15Maximum load limits......................................... 10-16Towing safety ................................................... 10-17

Uniform tire quality grading................................... 10-19Emission control system warranty ........................ 10-20Reporting safety defects (US only) ....................... 10-21Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test(US only) ............................................................... 10-21Owner’s Manual/Service Manual orderinformation............................................................. 10-22

In the event of a collision ................................. 10-22

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedureinstructed in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate)RecommendedspecificationsUS

measureImp

measureLiter

Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 76 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1

Engine oil*7Drain and refill

With oil filter change 5 qt 4-1/8 qt 4.7 O API Certification Mark*2, *3O API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy

Conserving*2, *3O ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II, GF-III*2, *3Without oil filter change 4-5/8 qt 3-7/8 qt 4.4

Cooling system Sedan AT 9 qt 7-1/2 qt 8.5

With reservoir Coupe, Sedan MT 9-1/4 qt 7-5/8 qt 8.7Genuine NISSAN anti-freeze coolant or equivalent

Reservoir 7/8 qt 3/5 qt 0.8

Automatic transmission fluid — — — Genuine Nissan ATF Matic Fluid J*4

Manual transmission gear oil — — — API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85

Differential gear oil — — — API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 80W-90*5

Power steering fluid Refill to the proper oil level according to the instruc-tions in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section.

Genuine Nissan PSFII or equivalent*9

Brake and clutch fluid Genuine Nissan Brake Fluid*6 or equivalent DOT 3 (U.S. FMVSS No. 116)

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*8

Air conditioning system lubricants — — — Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent

*1: For additional information, see later in this section for fuel recommendation.*2: For additional information, see later in this section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.*3: For additional information, see later in this section for recommended SAE viscosity number.*4: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan ATF Matic Fluid J will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and

may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.*5: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures always above 0°C (32°F).*6: Available in mainland US through your INFINITI retailer.*7: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.*8: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” in this section for air conditioner specification label.*9: Genuine Nissan PSF, Canada Nissan Automatic Transmission fluid, DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.

CAPACITIES ANDRECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS/FLUIDS

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Z 02.11.15/V35-D/V5.0 X

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Sedan models

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)number (Research octane number 91).

For improved vehicle performance, INFINITIrecommends the use of unleaded premiumgasoline with an octane rating of at least 91AKI number (Research octane number 96).

Coupe models

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an oc-tane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-KnockIndex) number (Research octane number 96).

If premium gasoline is not available, unleadedregular gasoline with an octane rating of 87AKI number (Research octane number 91)may be temporarily used, but only under thefollowing precautions:

O Have the fuel tank filled only partially withunleaded regular gasoline, and fill up withunleaded premium gasoline as soon aspossible.

O Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-eration.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-

line is recommended.

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emission con-trol devices and systems, and couldalso affect the warranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, since this willdamage the three-way catalyst.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing refor-mulated gasolines. These gasolines are spe-cially designed to reduce vehicle emissions.INFINITI supports efforts towards cleaner airand suggests that you use reformulated gaso-line when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containingoxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE andmethanol with or without advertising their pres-ence. INFINITI does not recommend the useof fuels of which the oxygenate content andthe fuel compatibility for your INFINITI cannotbe readily determined. If in doubt, ask your

service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, pleasetake the following precautions as the usage ofsuch fuels may cause vehicle performanceproblems and/or fuel system damage.

O The fuel must be unleaded and have anoctane rating no lower than that recom-mended for unleaded gasoline.

O If an oxygenate-blend, excepting amethanol blend, is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

O If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol (me-thyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It shouldalso contain a suitable amount of appro-priate cosolvents and corrosion inhibi-tors. If not properly formulated with ap-propriate cosolvents and corrosioninhibitors, such methanol blends maycause fuel system damage and/or ve-hicle performance problems. At thistime, sufficient data is not available toensure that all methanol blends are suit-able for use in INFINITI vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as enginestalling and hard hot starting are experienced

Technical and consumer information 10-3

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel witha low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

Aftermarket fuel additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use of anyfuel additives (i.e. fuel injector cleaner, octanebooster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.)which are sold commercially. Many of theseadditives intended for gum, varnish or depositremoval may contain active solvent or similaringredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tips

In most parts of North America, you should useunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of atleast 87 or 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number.However, you may use unleaded gasoline withan octane rating as low as 85 AKI number inthese high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219m)] such as: Colorado, Montana, New Mexico,Utah, Wyoming, northeastern Nevada, south-ern Idaho, western South Dakota, westernNebraska, and that part of Texas which isdirectly south of New Mexico.

Using unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than stated above can causepersistent, heavy spark knock. (Sparkknock is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If youdetect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on levelroads, have your dealer correct the condi-tion. Failure to correct the condition ismisuse of the vehicle, for which INFINITI isnot responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking,after-run or overheating. This in turn maycause excessive fuel consumption or damageto the engine. If any of the above symptomsare encountered, have your vehicle checked atan INFINITI retailer or other competent servicefacility.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is nocause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct quality, andviscosity oil to ensure satisfactory engine lifeand performance. INFINITI recommends theuse of a low friction oil (energy conserving oil)in order to improve fuel economy and con-serve energy. Oils which do not have thespecified quality label should not be used asthey could cause engine damage.

Only those engine oils with the American Pe-troleum Institute (API) certification mark on the

front of the container should be used. This typeof oil supersedes the existing API SG, SH, orSJ and Energy Conserving I & II categories.

If you cannot find engine oil with the APIcertification mark, use an API grade SG/SH,Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ orSL, Energy conserving oil. An oil with a singledesignation SG or SH, or in combination withother categories (for example, SG/CC orSG/CD) may also be used if one with the APIcertification mark cannot be found. An ILSACgrade GF-I, GF-II, GF-III oil can also be used.

INFINITI recommends mineral based oils.These oils must however, meet the API quality

and SAE viscosity ratings specified for yourvehicle.

Oil additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is notnecessary when the proper oil type is usedand maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or hasbeen previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is impor-tant that the engine oil viscosity be selectedbased on the temperatures at which the ve-hicle will be operated before the next oilchange. The recommended SAE viscositynumber chart shows the recommended oilviscosities for the expected ambient tempera-tures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than thatrecommended could cause serious enginedamage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replac-ing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalentfor the reason described in change intervals.

STI0293


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Oil and filter other thanthe specified quality, or oil and filter changeintervals longer than recommended could re-duce engine life. Damage to engines causedby improper maintenance or use of incorrectoil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the new INFINITI vehicle warran-ties.

Your engine was filled with a high qualityengine oil when it was built. You do not have tochange the oil before the first recommendedchange interval. Oil and filter change intervalsdepend upon how you use your vehicle. Op-eration under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes.

O repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures,

O driving in dusty conditions,

O extensive idling,

O towing a trailer,

O stop and go “rush hour” traffic.

O aggressive driving

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITYNUMBER

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for allambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30,10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if theambient temperature is above 0°F (−18°C).

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANTRECOMMENDATIONSThe air conditioning system in this INFINITIvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant,Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or the exactequivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or lubri-cant will cause severe damage to the airconditioning system and will require thereplacement of all air conditioner sys-tem components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourINFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’sozone layer. Although this refrigerant does notaffect the earth’s atmosphere, certain govern-mental regulations require the recovery andrecycling of any refrigerant during automotiveair conditioning system service. Your INFINITIretailer has the trained technicians and equip-ment needed to recover and recycle your airconditioning system refrigerant.

Contact your INFINITI retailer when servicingyour air conditioning system.

TI1028-C


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

ENGINE

Model VQ35DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)

Displacement cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498)

Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6*

Idle speed rpmSee the emission control label onthe underside of the hood.

Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm

CO percentage at idle speed [No air] %

Spark plugStandard PLFR5A-11

Service option PLFR4A-11, PLFR6A-11

Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehiclemeets all requirements of the CanadianInterference-Causing Equipment Regula-tions.

TI0001-A

SPECIFICATIONS


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

WHEELS AND TIRES

Sedan

Road wheel

Type Size Offset in (mm)

Aluminum16 x 6-1/2JJ 1.57 (40)

17 x 7JJ 1.75 (45)

TireConventional

P205/65R16 94VP215/55R17 93V/W

SpareT145/90D16Conventional*

*: For option

Coupe

Road wheel

Type Position Size Offset in (mm)

Aluminum

Front17 x 7-1/2JJ 1.18 (30)

18 x 8JJ 1.18 (30)

Rear17 x 8JJ 1.30 (33)

18 x 8JJ 1.18 (30)

Tire

ConventionalFront

P225/50R17 93VP225/45R18 91W

RearP235/50R17 95VP245/45R18 96W

SpareT145/90D16T155/80R17*Conventional*

*: For option

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Sedan Coupe

Overall length in (mm) 186.5 (4,736) 182.2 (4,628)

Overall width in (mm) 69.0 (1,753) 71.5 (1,815)

Overall height in (mm) 57.7 (1,467) 54.8 (1,393)

Front tread in (mm)59.4 (1,510)*159.1 (1,500)*2

60.4 (1,535)

Rear tread in (mm)59.6 (1,515)*159.3 (1,505)*2

60.6 (1,540)*360.8 (1,545)*4

Wheelbase in (mm) 112.2 (2,850) ←Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg)

See the F.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel on the driver’s side lockpillar.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

*1: For models with road wheel size — 16 x 6.5JJ [offset 1.57 in (40 mm)]*2: For models with road wheel size — 17 x 7JJ [offset 1.75 in (45 mm)]*3: For models with road wheel size — 17 x 8JJ [offset 1.30 in (33 mm)]*4: For models with road wheel size — 18 x 8JJ [offset 1.18 in (30 mm)]


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

When planning to travel in another country,you should first find out if the fuel available issuitable for your vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with too low an octane rating maycause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded engine gaso-line. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle toareas where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicleemission control and safety standards varyaccording to the country, state, province ordistrict; therefore, vehicle specifications maydiffer.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, transpor-tation, and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. INFINITI is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is at-tached as shown. This number is the identifi-cation for your vehicle and is used in thevehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

STI0038 STI0302

WHEN TRAVELING ORREGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE INANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine asshown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards(F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed asshown. This label contains valuable vehicleinformation, such as: Gross Vehicle WeightRatings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number, (VIN), etc. Re-view it carefully.

STI0303 STI0186A STI0330


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is at-tached as shown.

TIRE PLACARD

The cold tire pressure is shown on the tireplacard affixed to the inside of the rear left dooropening (Sedan), the driver side center pillar(Coupe).

STI0317 STI0309A STI0331


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

AIR CONDITIONERSPECIFICATION LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixedinside of the hood as shown.

Use the following steps to mount the bumpercover:

Before mounting the bumper cover, confirmthat the following parts are enclosed in thevinyl bag.

O Front bumper cover

O J-nut x 2

O Screw x 2

1. Temporarily place the bumper cover andmark on the J-nut inserting place.

2. Remove the bumper cover.

3. Insert a J-nut into the backside of thebumper fascia.

4. Install the bumper cover with screws.

STI0306

STI0307

INSTALLING FRONT BUMPERCOVER


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Use the following steps to mount the licenseplate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm thatthe following parts are enclosed in the vinylbag.

O License plate bracket

O J-nut x 2

O Screw x 2

O Screw grommet x 2

1. Temporarily place the license plate bracketand mark the pilot hole points jA usingholes jB while aligning the towing hook holeof the front bumper fascia.

2. Remove the license plate bracket.

3. Carefully drill two pilot holes jA using a 0.39in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked locations.(Be sure that the drill only goes throughthe fascia, or damage to the nut mayoccur.)

4. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.

5. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into thegrommet hole to turn part jC 90 degrees.

6. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracketbefore placing the license plate bracket onthe fascia.STI0332

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSEPLATE


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

7. Install the license plate bracket with screws.

8. Install the license plate with bolts that areno longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

WARNING

O It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area inside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injuredor killed

O Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seat belts.

O Be sure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with thefollowing terms before loading your vehicle:

O Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle)- vehicle weight including: standard andoptional equipment, fluids, emergencytools, and spare tire assembly. This weightdoes not include passengers and cargo.

O GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weightplus the combined weight of passengersand cargo.

O GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -maximum total weight (load) limit specifiedfor the vehicle.

O GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maxi-mum weight (load) limit specified for thefront or rear axle.

DETERMINING VEHICLE LOADCAPACITY

The load capacity of this vehicle is determinedby weight, not by available cargo space. Forexample, a luggage rack, bike carrier, cartopcarrier or similar equipment does not increaseload carrying capacity of your vehicle.

To determine vehicle load capacity:

Vehicle weight can be determined by using acommercial-grade scale, found at places suchas a truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator,or a scrap metal recycling facility.

1. Determine the curb weight of your vehicle.

2. Compare the curb weight amount to theGVWR specified for your vehicle to deter-mine how much more weight your vehiclecan carry.

3. After loading (cargo and passengers), re-weigh your vehicle to determine if eitherGVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is ex-

VEHICLE LOADINGINFORMATION


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

ceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, removecargo as necessary. If either the front orrear GAWR is exceeded, shift the load orremove cargo as necessary.

LOADING TIPS

O The GVW must not exceed GVWR orGAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. cer-tification label.

O Do not load the front and rear axle to theGAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

WARNING

O Properly secure all cargo to help pre-vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause per-sonal injury.

O Do not load your vehicle any heavierthan the GVWR or the maximum frontand rear GAWRs. If you do, parts onyour vehicle can break, or it canchange the way your vehicle handles.This could result in loss of control

and cause personal injury.

O Overloading can shorten the life ofyour vehicle. Failures caused byoverloading are not covered by yourwarranty.

Your new vehicle was designed to be usedprimarily to carry passengers and cargo. Re-member that towing a trailer will place addi-tional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain, steering, braking and other systems.

Information on trailer towing ability and thespecial equipment required should be ob-tained from your INFINITI retailer. Your retailercan obtain an INFINITI Trailer Towing Guidefor you.

TI1011M

TOWING A TRAILER


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed1,000 lb (454 kg). The total trailer load equalstrailer weight plus its cargo weight. Towingloads greater than 1,000 lb (454 kg) or usingimproper towing equipment could adverselyaffect vehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, butalso the places you plan to tow. Tow weightsappropriate for level highway driving may haveto be reduced on very steep grades or in lowtraction situations (for example, on slipperyboat ramps).

WARNING

Vehicle damage and/or personal injuryresulting from improper towing proce-dures are not covered by INFINITI war-ranties. An INFINITI Trailer Towing Guide(U.S. only) containing information ontrailer towing ability and the special

equipment required may be obtainedfrom an authorized INFINITI retailer.

Tongue load

Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11% ofthe total trailer load. If the tongue load be-comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow forproper tongue load.

Maximum gross vehicle weight/maximum gross axle weight

The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehiclemust not exceed. GVWR shown on theF.M.V.S.S. certification label. The gross ve-hicle weight equals the combined weight of theunloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch,trailer tongue load and any other optionalequipment. In addition, front or rear gross axleweight must not exceed GAWR shown on theF.M.V.S.S. certification label.

TI1012M


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHARTUnit: lb (kg)

MAXIMUMTOWING LOAD

1,000 (454)

MAXIMUMTONGUE LOAD

110 (49)

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle andtrailer. Make sure the trailer hitch is securelyattached to the vehicle, to help avoid personalinjury or property damage due to sway causedby crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passingtrucks.

CAUTION

O Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

O The hitch should not be attached toor affect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

O Do not modify the vehicle exhaustsystem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

O To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thehitch and/or receiver when not in use.After the hitch is removed, seal thebolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes,water or dust from entering the pas-senger compartment.

O Regularly check that all hitch mount-ing bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

O When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicletires to the recommended cold tire pressureindicated on the tire placard (located on theinside of the rear left door opening (Sedan),the driver side center pillar (Coupe).

O Trailer tire condition, size, load rating andproper inflation pressure should be in ac-cordance with the trailer and tire manufac-turers’ specifications.

Safety chain

Always use a suitable chain between yourvehicle and the trailer. The chain should becrossed and should be attached to the hitch,

not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure toleave enough slack in the chain to permitturning corners.

Trailer lights

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/orlocal regulations. When wiring the vehicle fortowing, connect the stop and tail light pickupinto the vehicle electrical circuit at a pointbetween the sensor and stop light or lightswitch.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking sys-tem, make sure it conforms to federal and/orlocal regulations and that it is properly in-stalled.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake systemdirectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

O Be certain your vehicle maintains a levelposition when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle ifit has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

condition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other pos-sible causes of either condition.

O Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shifts while driving.

O Be certain your rear view mirrors conform toall federal, state or local regulations. If not,install any mirrors required for towing be-fore driving the vehicle.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding ofthe vehicle’s behavior, you should practiceturning, stopping and backing up in an areawhich is free from traffic. Steering stability, andbraking performance will be somewhat differ-ent than under normal driving conditions.

O Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

O Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

O Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

O Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

O Always block the wheels on both vehicleand trailer when parking. Parking on aslope is not recommended; however, if youmust do so, and if your vehicle is equipped

with automatic transmission, first apply theparking brake and block the wheels, andthen move the transmission selector leverinto the P (Park) position. If you move theselector lever to the P (Park) position be-fore blocking the wheels and applying theparking brake, the transmission may bedamaged.

O When going down a hill, shift into a lowergear and use the engine braking effect.When ascending on a long grade, down-shift the transmission to a lower gear andreduce speed to reduce chances of engineoverloading and/or overheating.

O If the engine coolant rises to an extremelyhigh temperature when the air conditioningsystem is on, turn off the air conditioner.Coolant heat can be additionally vented byopening the windows, switching the fancontrol to high and setting the temperaturecontrol to the HOT position.

O Trailer towing consumes more fuel thannormal circumstances.

O Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km).

O Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedmaintenance schedule.

O When making a turn, your trailer wheels willbe closer to the inside of the turn than yourvehicle wheels. To compensate for this,make a larger than normal turning radiusduring the turn.

O Crosswinds and rough roads will adverselyaffect vehicle/trailer handling, possiblycausing vehicle sway. When being passedby larger vehicles, be prepared for possiblechanges in crosswinds that could affectvehicle handling. If swaying does occur,firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straightahead, and immediately (but gradually) re-duce vehicle speed. This combination willhelp stabilize the vehicle. Never increasespeed.

O Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requires con-siderably more distance than normal pass-ing. Remember the length of the trailermust also pass the other vehicle before youcan safely change lanes.

O To maintain engine braking efficiency andelectrical charging performance, do not usesixth gear (manual transmission) or fifthposition (automatic transmission).

O Avoid holding the brake pedal down toolong or too frequently such as on longdown-hill sections of road. This could cause


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

the brakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency. Shift down and use en-gine braking.

When towing a trailer, change transmissionoil more frequently.See “Periodic maintenance schedules” inthe “9. Maintenance” section. Shift downand use engine braking.

DOT (Department Of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conformto federal safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

Treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on tire wear rate when tested undercontrolled conditions on specified governmenttest courses. For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as wellon the government course as a tire graded100. However, relative tire performance de-pends on actual driving conditions, and mayvary significantly from the norm due to varia-tions in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphalt

and concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to your ve-hicle tires is based on straight-aheadbraking traction tests, and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hydro-planing, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

Temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C. They represent a tire’s resistance toheat build-up, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause tire mate-rial to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessivetemperatures can lead to sudden tire failure.Grade C corresponds to a performance levelwhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades A and B represent higher levels ofperformance on laboratory test wheels thanthe minimum required by law.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITYGRADING


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Excessivespeed, underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or in combina-tion, can cause heat buildup and pos-sible tire failure.

Your INFINITI is covered by the followingemission warranties.

For US:

O Emission Defects Warranty

O Emissions Performance Warranty(See Warranty Information Booklet for de-tails.)

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-formation Booklet (Warranty and RoadsideAssistance Information (Canada only)) thatcomes with your INFINITI. If you did not re-ceive a Warranty Information Booklet (War-ranty and Roadside Assistance Information(Canada only)), or it has become lost, you mayobtain a replacement by writing to:

O INFINITI DivisionNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 47038, Gardena, CA 90247-6838

O Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

O INFINITI DivisionNissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii, Ltd.Consumer Affairs Department2880 Kilihau StreetHonolulu, Hawaii 96819

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to no-tifying INFINITI.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your retailer, or INFINITI.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the AutoSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236.You may also write to: NHTSA, U.S. De-partment of Transportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehicle safety fromthe Hotline.

You may notify INFINITI by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-662-6200.In Hawaii call (808) 836-0888.

Due to legal requirements in some states/areas, your vehicle may be required to be inwhat is called the “ready condition” for anInspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emis-sion control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”when it is driven through certain driving pat-terns. Usually, the “ready condition” can beobtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repairedor the battery is disconnected, the vehicle maybe reset to a not “ready condition”. Beforetaking the I/M test, drive the vehicle throughthe following pattern to set the vehicle to theready condition. If you cannot or do not want toperform the driving pattern, an INFINITI re-tailer can conduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe andprudent manner according to traffic con-ditions, and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idleuntil the engine coolant temperature gaugeneedle points between the C and H (normaloperating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h), then quickly release the acceleratorpedal completely and keep it released for atleast 6 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for amoment, then drive the vehicle at a speedof 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least5 minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 3 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-utes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the automatic trans-mission selector lever in the “P” or “N”position or the manual transmission shiftlever in the “N” position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10.Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one moretime.

If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode is ac-ceptable between steps. Do not stop the en-gine until step 7 is completed.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS(US only)

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (USonly)


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information foryour vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illus-trations and step-by-step diagnostic and ad-justment procedures, this manual is the sameone used by the factory trained techniciansworking at authorized INFINITI dealerships.Also available are genuine INFINITI Owner’sManuals, and genuine INFINITI Service andOwner’s Manuals for older INFINITI models.

In the USA:

For current pricing and availability of genuineINFINITI Service Manuals for the 2000 modelyear and later, contact:

Tweddle Litho Company1-800-639-8841www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineINFINITI Service Manuals for the 1999 modelyear and prior, see an authorized INFINITIdealer, or contact:

DDS Distribution Services, Ltd.20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuineINFINITI Owner’s Manuals for the 2003model year and prior, see an authorized

INFINITI dealer, or contact:

DDS Distribution Services, Ltd.20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

In Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITIService Manual or Owner’s Manual pleasecontact your nearest INFINITI dealer. For thephone number and location of an INFINITIdealer in your area call the INFINITI Satisfac-tion Center at 1-800-361-4792 and a bilingualINFINITI representative will assist you.

Also available are genuine INFINITI Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older INFINITI mod-els.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this un-likely event, there is some important informa-tion you should know. Many insurance compa-nies routinely authorize the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to cut costs,among other reasons.

Insist on the use of Genuine InfinitiCollision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using

parts made to INFINITI’s original exactingspecifications — if you want to help it to lastand hold its resale value, the solution issimple. Tell your insurance agent and yourrepair shop to only use Genuine InfinitiCollision Parts. INFINITI does not warrantnon-Infiniti parts, nor does Infiniti’s warrantyapply to damage caused by a non-genuineparts.

Using Genuine Infiniti Parts can help protectyour personal safety, preserve your warrantyprotection and maintain the resale value ofyour vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased,using Genuine Infiniti Parts may prevent orlimit unnecessary excess wear and tear ex-penses at the end of your lease.

INFINITI designs its hoods with crumple zonesto minimize the risk that the hood will penetratethe windshield of your vehicle in an accident.Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not providesuch built in safety features. Also, non-genuineparts often show premature wear, rust andcorrosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must beadvised if non-genuine parts are used to repairyour vehicle. And some states/provinces haveenacted laws that restrict insurance compa-nies from authorizing the use of non-genuine

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

collision parts during the new vehicle warranty.These laws help protect you, so you can takeaction to protect yourself.

It’s your right!


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

11 Index

A

ABS (Anti-lock brake system)......................... 5-20Air bag system, Front (See supplemental front airbag system) .................................................... 1-17Air bag warning labels .................................... 1-23Air bag warning light.............................. 1-23, 2-11Air cleaner housing filter ................................. 8-16Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation ............................. 4-3Air conditioner service ......................... 4-3, 4-6Air conditioner specification label............ 10-12Air conditioning system refrigerant andlubricant recommendations................ 4-6, 10-6Dual zone button (if so equipped)............... 4-5Economical operation (ECON).................... 4-4Heater and air conditioner (automatic) ....... 4-3Microfilter ..................................................... 4-5

Alcohol, drugs and driving ................................ 5-4Ambient temperature, Air conditioner ............... 4-5Anchor point locations

Top tether strap......................................... 1-42Antenna........................................................... 4-17Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)........................ 5-20Anti-lock brake warning light............................. 2-9Appearance care

Exterior appearance care............................ 7-2Interior appearance care ............................. 7-3

Armrest ............................................................. 1-8

Ashtrays (See cigarette lighter andashtray) ........................................................... 2-24Audible reminders........................................... 2-13Audio operation precautions............................. 4-8Audio system .................................................... 4-6

Steering audio control ............................... 4-17Autochanger

Compact Disc (CD) ................................... 4-15Automatic

Adjusting function (Coupe)........................ 2-33Anti-glare inside mirror .............................. 3-17Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ............. 8-9Drive positioner ......................................... 3-19Driving with automatic transmission .... 5-4, 5-8Operation (For all door windows or front doorwindows).................................................... 2-32Seat positioner, seat ................................. 3-19Sunroof ...................................................... 2-33Transmission selector lever lockrelease....................................................... 5-12

Avoiding collision and rollover .......................... 5-3

B

Battery............................................................. 8-13Battery saver system................................. 2-18

Battery replacement, (See remote keyless entrysystem) ............................................................. 3-8Before starting the engine ................................ 5-7

Belts (See drive belts) .................................... 8-14Brake

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ................... 5-20Brake and clutch fluid................................ 8-11Brake booster ............................................ 8-19Brake fluid ................................................. 8-11Brake pedal ............................................... 8-18Brake pedal check..................................... 8-18Brake system............................................. 5-19Parking brake check ........................ 5-14, 8-18Parking brake operation ............................ 5-14Warning light ............................................... 2-9

Break-in schedule ........................................... 5-17Bulb check/instrument panel ............................ 2-9Bulb replacement............................................ 8-22

C

Cabin air filter ................................................... 4-5Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants/fluid ................................................................. 10-2Car phone or CB radio ................................... 4-18Cargo (See vehicle loading information) ........ 2-29Cargo net ........................................................ 2-29Cassette player (See audio system) .............. 4-14Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst............ 5-3CD care and cleaning..................................... 4-16Child restraints................................................ 1-33

Installation on front passenger seat.......... 1-43

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Installation on rear seat outboard or centerpositions .................................................... 1-35Precautions on child restraints.................. 1-33Top tether strap anchor point locations .... 1-42With top tether strap.................................. 1-41

Child safety ..................................................... 1-27Child safety rear door lock................................ 3-5Chimes, Audible reminders............................. 2-13Cigarette lighter and ashtray .......................... 2-24Circuit breaker, Fusible link ............................ 8-20Cleaning exterior and interior .................... 7-2, 7-3Clock ............................................................... 2-23Clutch fluid ...................................................... 8-11Coat fook (Coupe) .......................................... 2-30Cold weather driving....................................... 5-23Compact Disc (CD) changer operation .......... 4-15Compact spare tire ......................................... 8-34Compass display .............................................. 2-6Console box.................................................... 2-28Controls

Heater and air conditioner controls(automatic)................................................... 4-3Steering audio control ............................... 4-17

CoolantCapacities and recommended fuel/lubricants/fluids .......................................................... 10-2Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-6Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-5

Corrosion protection ......................................... 7-5Cruise control.................................................. 5-15Cup holder ...................................................... 2-26

D

Daytime running light system ......................... 2-19Defroster switch, Rear window and outside mirrordefroster switch ............................................. 2-16Dehumidified defrosting or defogging............... 4-4Dimensions and weights................................. 10-8Door open warning light ................................. 2-10Drive belts ....................................................... 8-14Drive positioner, Automatic............................. 3-19Driving

Cold weather driving ................................. 5-23Driving with automatic transmission .... 5-4, 5-8Driving with manual transmission ...... 5-5, 5-12Precautions when starting and driving........ 5-2

E

Economy, Fuel ................................................ 5-17Emission control information label................ 10-11Emission control system warranty ................ 10-20Engine

Before starting the engine........................... 5-7Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants/fluids .......................................................... 10-2Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-6Changing engine oil and filter ..................... 8-8Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-5Checking engine oil level ............................ 8-7Coolant temperature gauge ........................ 2-5Engine block heater .................................. 5-24Engine compartment check locations ......... 8-4Engine cooling system ................................ 8-5

Engine oil..................................................... 8-7Engine oil and oil filter recommendation... 10-5Engine oil viscosity.................................... 10-5Engine serial number .............................. 10-10Engine specifications................................. 10-7If your vehicle overheats ........................... 6-10Starting the engine ...................................... 5-7

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ...................... 5-2

F

F.M.V.S.S. certification label......................... 10-10Filter, Air cleaner housing filter....................... 8-16Flashers (See hazard warning flasherswitch)............................................................. 2-20Flat tire.............................................................. 6-2Floor mat cleaning ............................................ 7-4Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ............. 8-9Brake and clutch fluid................................ 8-11Brake fluid ................................................. 8-11Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants/fluids .......................................................... 10-2Engine coolant............................................. 8-5Engine oil..................................................... 8-7Power steering fluid................................... 8-10Window washer fluid ................................. 8-12

FM-AM-satellite radio with cassette player andCompact Disc (CD) changer........................... 4-11Fog light switch............................................... 2-20Front air bag system (See supplemental restraintsystem) ........................................................... 1-17Front manual seat adjustment .......................... 1-2Front power seat adjustment ............................ 1-4

11-2

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

FuelCapacities and recommended fuel/lubricants/fluids .......................................................... 10-2filler cap ..................................................... 3-14filler lid ....................................................... 3-14Fuel economy............................................ 5-17Fuel octane rating ..................................... 10-3Fuel recommendation................................ 10-3Gauge.......................................................... 2-5

Fuses .............................................................. 8-20Fusible links .................................................... 8-20

G

Garage door opener, HomeLink UniversalTransceiver ..................................................... 2-37Gas cap .......................................................... 3-14Gauge ............................................................... 2-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge............. 2-5Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-5Odometer..................................................... 2-4Speedometer ............................................... 2-4Tachometer ................................................. 2-4

General maintenance ....................................... 9-2Glasses case .................................................. 2-26Glove box........................................................ 2-27Glove box lock ................................................ 2-27

H

Hazard warning flasher switch........................ 2-20Head restraints ................................................. 1-9

HeadlightsBulb replacement ...................................... 8-25Headlight switch ........................................ 2-17Xenon headlights ..................................... 2-17

Heated seats................................................... 2-21Heater

Engine coolant heater ............................... 5-24Heater and air conditioner (automatic) ....... 4-3

HomeLink Universal Transceiver.................. 2-37Hood, release ................................................. 3-10Horn ................................................................ 2-21How to stop alarm, Vehicle security ............... 2-14

I

Ignition switch ................................................... 5-4Automatic transmission models ........... 5-4, 5-8Key positions ............................................... 5-6Manual transmission models ............. 5-5, 5-12

Immobilizer system ......................................... 2-14In-cabin microfilter ............................................ 4-5Indicator lights................................................. 2-11Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System, Enginestart ................................................................... 5-6Inside Automatic anti-glare mirror................... 3-17Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test................. 10-21Installing front bumper cover ........................ 10-12Instrument panel ............................................... 2-2Instrument pocket ........................................... 2-25Interior light ..................................................... 2-35Interior light replacement ................................ 8-26Interior trunk lid release.................................. 3-12ISOFIX child restraint ..................................... 1-40

J

Jump starting .................................................... 6-7

K

Keyless entry (See remote keyless entrysystem) ............................................................. 3-5Keys .................................................................. 3-2

L

Label, Air conditioner specification label ...... 10-12Label, Emission control information label..... 10-11Label, F.M.V.S.S. certification label.............. 10-10Labels

Air bag warning labels............................... 1-23Engine serial number .............................. 10-10Vehicle identification number (VIN)........... 10-9

LATCH system................................................ 1-40License plate, Installing front license plate... 10-13Light

Air bag warning light ................................. 1-23Bulb replacement ...................................... 8-23Flashing signal .......................................... 2-19Fog light switch ......................................... 2-20Headlight switch ........................................ 2-17Headlights Bulb replacement .................... 8-25Interior light................................................ 2-35Map light.................................................... 2-35Rear personal light .................................... 2-36Replacement ............................................. 8-23Trunk light.................................................. 2-37

11-3

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Vanity mirror light ...................................... 2-36Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders ........................................... 2-9, 2-11Xenon headlights ..................................... 2-17

Lights, Exterior and interior lightreplacement .................................................... 8-26Loading information (See vehicle loadinginformation) ................................................... 10-14Lock

Door locks ................................................... 3-3Glove box lock........................................... 2-27Power door lock .......................................... 3-3Trunk lid lock opener lever........................ 3-10

M

MaintenanceBattery ....................................................... 8-13Chassis and body...................................... 9-10Emission control system ........................... 9-10General maintenance .................................. 9-2Inside the vehicle ........................................ 9-3Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-2Outside the vehicle...................................... 9-3Periodic maintenance schedules ................ 9-5Seat belt maintenance .............................. 1-32Under the hood and vehicle........................ 9-4

Manual front seat adjustment ........................... 1-2Map light ......................................................... 2-35Meters and gauges........................................... 2-3Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror ............. 3-17Outside mirror control................................ 3-18Outside mirrors.......................................... 3-18

N

NetCargo net................................................... 2-29Small cargo net (Sedan for Canada) ........ 2-30

New vehicle break-in ...................................... 5-17Nissan vehicle Immobilizer System................ 2-13

O

Odometer .......................................................... 2-4Oil

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants/fluids .......................................................... 10-2Changing engine oil and filter ..................... 8-8Checking engine oil level ............................ 8-7Engine oil..................................................... 8-7Engine oil viscosity.................................... 10-5

Outside mirror control ..................................... 3-18Outside mirrors ............................................... 3-18Overheat, If your vehicle overheats................ 6-10

P

ParkingBrake check............................................... 8-18Parking brake check.................................. 5-14Parking brake operation ............................ 5-14Parking on hills.......................................... 5-14

Parking/parking on hills .................................. 5-18Periodic maintenance schedules...................... 9-5Phone, Car phone or CB radio....................... 4-18Pocket (Manual transmission model) ............. 2-25

PowerPower door lock .......................................... 3-3Power front seat adjustment ....................... 1-4Power outlet .............................................. 2-23Power steering fluid................................... 8-10Power steering system.............................. 5-19Power windows ......................................... 2-31

Pre-tensioner seat belt system....................... 1-22Precautions

Audio operation precautions ....................... 4-8Braking precautions................................... 5-19Cruise control precautions ........................ 5-15Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-2On child restraints ..................................... 1-33On seat belt usage.................................... 1-25Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem ....................................................... 1-11Precautions when starting and driving........ 5-2

Push starting..................................................... 6-9

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio.............................. 4-18FM-AM radio operation ............................. 4-11Satellite radio antenna .............................. 4-18Satellite radio operation ............................ 4-12Satellite radio reception............................... 4-8Steering audio control ............................... 4-17

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test(US only) ....................................................... 10-21Rear armrest pocket ....................................... 2-29Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock...... 3-5Rear personal light ......................................... 2-36

11-4

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Rear power point ............................................ 2-23Rear seat adjustment ....................................... 1-7Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch .............................................................. 2-16Registering your vehicle in another country ... 10-9Remote keyless entry system........................... 3-5Reporting safety defects (US only)............... 10-21Roadside assistance program .......................... 6-2Rollover............................................................. 5-3

S

SafetyChild seat belts.......................................... 1-27Reporting safety defects (US only) ......... 10-21Towing safety .......................................... 10-17

Satellite radio antenna.................................... 4-18Satellite radio operation.................................. 4-12Satellite radio reception .................................... 4-8Seat

Belt warning light....................................... 1-25Belt warning light and chime..................... 2-11

Seat adjustmentFront manual seat adjustment .................... 1-2Front power seat adjustment ...................... 1-4Rear seat adjustment .................................. 1-7

Seat belt(s)Child safety................................................ 1-27Infants and small children ......................... 1-28Injured persons.......................................... 1-29Larger children .......................................... 1-28Pre-tensioner seat belt system ................. 1-22Precautions on seat belt usage ................ 1-25Pregnant women ....................................... 1-29

Seat belt cleaning........................................ 7-4Seat belt extenders ................................... 1-32Seat belt maintenance .............................. 1-32Seat belts .................................................. 1-25Three-point type with retractor .................. 1-29

Seat(s)Heated seats ............................................. 2-21Seats ........................................................... 1-2

Secondary trunk lid release............................ 3-13Security system, vehicle security system....... 2-13Security systems (Infiniti Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem), Engine start ..................................... 2-14Security systems (See vehicle securitysystem) ........................................................... 2-13Servicing air conditioner ............................ 4-3, 4-6Shift lock release ............................................ 5-12Shifting

Automatic transmission........................ 5-4, 5-8Manual transmission .......................... 5-5, 5-12

Shoulder belt height adjustment (For Sedan frontseats) .............................................................. 1-31Shoulder belt guide (Coupe)........................... 1-32Small cargo net (Sedan for Canada).............. 2-30Soft bottle holder ............................................ 2-27Stowing golf bags ........................................... 2-30Spark plugs..................................................... 8-15Speedometer .................................................... 2-4Starting

Before starting the engine........................... 5-7Jump starting............................................... 6-7Precautions when starting and driving........ 5-2Push starting ............................................... 6-9Starting the engine ...................................... 5-7

SteeringPower steering fluid................................... 8-10Power steering system.............................. 5-19Steering switch for audio control............... 4-17Tilting steering wheel ................................ 3-16

Storage ........................................................... 2-25Sun shade....................................................... 2-34Sun visors ....................................................... 3-16Sunroof ........................................................... 2-33Supplemental air bag warning labels ............. 1-23Supplemental air bag warning light....... 1-23, 2-11Supplemental front air bag system................. 1-17Supplemental restraint system ....................... 1-11

Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem ....................................................... 1-11

Supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impactair bag systems .............................................. 1-20Switch

Audio control ............................................. 4-17Fog light switch ......................................... 2-20Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-20Headlight switch ........................................ 2-17Ignition switch.............................................. 5-4Ignition switch automatic transmissionmodels.................................................. 5-4, 5-8Ignition switch manual transmissionmodels................................................ 5-5, 5-12Power door lock switch ............................... 3-4Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch......................................................... 2-16Turn signal switch ..................................... 2-19

11-5

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

T

Tachometer....................................................... 2-4Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperaturegauge ................................................................ 2-5Theft (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System), Enginestart ................................................................. 2-14Three way catalyst............................................ 5-3Tilting steering wheel ...................................... 3-16Tire

Flat tire ........................................................ 6-2Uniform tire quality grading ..................... 10-19

TiresSpare tire................................................... 8-34Tire chains................................................. 8-31Tire placard ............................................. 10-11Tire pressure ............................................. 8-30Types of tires............................................. 8-30wheel/tire size............................................ 10-8Wheels and tires ....................................... 8-30

Top tether strap child restraints...................... 1-41Towing

Tow truck towing ....................................... 6-11Towing a trailer........................................ 10-15Towing load/specification chart ............... 10-15Towing safety .......................................... 10-17

Trailer towing ................................................ 10-15Transceiver, HomeLink UniversalTransceiver ..................................................... 2-37Transmission

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-10Driving with automatic transmission .... 5-4, 5-8Driving with manual transmission ...... 5-5, 5-12

Transmission selector lever lockrelease....................................................... 5-12

Transmitter (See remote keyless entrysystem) ............................................................. 3-5Traveling or registering your vehicle in anothercountry ............................................................ 10-9Trunk

Access through rear seat ............................ 1-8Interior trunk lid release ............................ 3-12Lid lock opener lever................................. 3-10Light........................................................... 2-37Secondary trunk lid release ...................... 3-13

Turn signal switch........................................... 2-19

U

Underbody cleaning.......................................... 7-3Uniform tire quality grading........................... 10-19

V

Vanity mirror light............................................ 2-36Vehicle

Dimensions and weights ........................... 10-8Dynamics control (VDC) system ............... 5-21Identification number (VIN) ....................... 10-9Loading information................................. 10-14Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)............ 6-13Security system ......................................... 2-13

Ventilators ......................................................... 4-2

W

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels .......... 1-23Warning light

Air bag warning light ........................ 1-23, 2-11Anti-lock brake warning light ....................... 2-9Brake warning light...................................... 2-9Door open warning light ............................ 2-10Seat belt warning light and chime............. 2-11

Warning lights ................................................... 2-9Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch ........ 2-20Warning, Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders .......................................................... 2-9Warranty, Emission control systemwarranty ........................................................ 10-20Washer switch, Windshield wiper and washerswitch .............................................................. 2-16Washing ............................................................ 7-2Waxing .............................................................. 7-2Weights (See dimensions and weights) ......... 10-8Wheel/tire size ................................................ 10-8Wheels and tires............................................. 8-30

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels................. 7-3Window washer fluid....................................... 8-12Window(s)

Automatic adjustment function (Coupe).... 2-33Automatic operation (For all door windows orfront door windows)................................... 2-32Cleaning ...................................................... 7-3Open/close with key .................................... 3-3Power windows ......................................... 2-31

Windshield wiper and washer switch.............. 2-16Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 2-16

11-6

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

Wiper blades ............................................. 8-16

X

Xenon headlights ........................................... 2-17

11-7

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO

11-8

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Sedan models

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)number (Research octane number 91).

For improved vehicle performance, INFINITIrecommends the use of unleaded premiumgasoline with an octane rating of at least 91AKI number (Research octane number 96).

Coupe models

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an oc-tane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-KnockIndex) number (Research octane number 96).

If premium gasoline is not available, unleadedregular gasoline with an octane rating of 87AKI number (Research octane number 91)may be temporarily used, but only under thefollowing precautions:

O Have the fuel tank filled only partially withunleaded regular gasoline, and fill up withunleaded premium gasoline as soon aspossible.

O Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-eration.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-line is recommended.

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emission con-trol systems, and may also affect war-ranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, since this willdamage the three way catalyst.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants” in the “10.Technical and consumer information” section.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

O API Certification Mark

O API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & IIor API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving

O ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III

O SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for allambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30 vis-cosity oil may be used for ambient tempera-tures above 0°F (−18°C).

See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “10. Technical and consumerinformation” section for engine oil and oil filterrecommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

See tire placard affixed to the inside of the rearleft door opening (Sedan), the driver sidecenter pillar (Coupe).

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-INPROCEDURESRECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) ofvehicle use, follow the recommendations out-lined in the “Break-in schedule” Informationfound in the “5. Starting and driving” section ofthis Owner’s Manual. Follow these recommen-dations for the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Engine oil 8-7

2. Meters and gauges 2-3

3. Hood release 3-10

4. Seat 1-2

5. Seat belt 1-25

6. Key 3-2

7. Trunk release 3-11

8. Spare tire 6-3, 8-33

9. Fuel 3-14, 10-2

10. Audio system 4-6Heater and air conditioner 4-3

11. Battery 8-12

12. Engine coolant 8-5

13. Windshield washer fluid 8-11

STI0308

Z 02.7.29/V35-D/V5.0 X

2003 infiniti g35

Documents

vehicle design

forewordyour infiniti

infiniti retailer

important informationabout

readyour owners manual

important driving rules

manualthis manual

owners literatureportfolio